Communication device

ABSTRACT

The communication device comprising a communication implementer, a TV program implementer, and a multiple language implementer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/784,286 filed2020 Feb. 7, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/355,850 filed2019 Mar. 18, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 15/456,765 filed2017 Mar. 13, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 14/732,821 filed2015 Jun. 8, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 14/258,027 filed2014 Apr. 22, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 13/857,153 filed2013 Apr. 5, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 13/417,257 filed2012 Mar. 11, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 13/225,570 filed2011 Sep. 6, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600 filed2004 Jul. 23, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, which claims the benefit ofU.S. Provisional Application No. 60/481,426 filed 2003 Sep. 26, all ofwhich are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U. S. Patent Publication No. 20030119562 is introduced as a prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: “There areprovided a task display switching method, a portable apparatus and aportable communications apparatus which, when a plurality of applicationsoftware are activated and processed in parallel, make it possible toswitch a display between each of the application software with ease.According to the task display switching method, the portable apparatusand the portable communications apparatus of the present invention, in aportable apparatus capable of processing a plurality of tasks inparallel and of displaying a plurality of display regions for displayingdata, an icon associated with a task displayed on a first display regionis generated automatically or manually, and the generated icon isdisplayed in a second display region. When any icon thus generated isselected from a plurality of icons displayed on the second displayregion, the task associated with the selected icon is restored anddisplayed in the first display region.” However, this prior art does notdisclose the communication device comprising a communicationimplementer, a TV program implementer, and a multiple languageimplementer.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

The present invention introduces the communication device comprising acommunication implementer, a TV program implementer, and a multiplelanguage implementer.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following description is of the best presently contemplated mode ofcarrying out the present invention. This description is not to be takenin a limiting sense but is made merely for the purpose of describing thegeneral principles of the invention. For example, each description ofrandom access memory in this specification illustrate(s) only onefunction or mode in order to avoid complexity in its explanation,however, such description does not mean that only one function or modecan be implemented at a time. In other words, more than one function ormode can be implemented simultaneously by way of utilizing the samerandom access memory. In addition, the figure number is cited after theelements in parenthesis in a manner for example ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. Itis done so merely to assist the readers to have a better understandingof this specification, and must not be used to limit the scope of theclaims in any manner since the figure numbers cited are not exclusive.There are only few data stored in each storage area described in thisspecification. This is done so merely to simplify the explanation and,thereby, to enable the reader of this specification to understand thecontent of each function with less confusion. Therefore, more than fewdata (hundreds and thousands of data, if necessary) of the same kind,not to mention, are preferred to be stored in each storage area to fullyimplement each function described herein. The scope of the inventionshould be determined by referencing the appended claims.

FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of the Communication Device 200utilized in the present invention. Referring to FIG. 1, CommunicationDevice 200 includes CPU 211 which controls and administers the overallfunction and operation of Communication Device 200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206to temporarily store data and/or to perform calculation to perform itsfunction, and to implement the present invention, modes, functions, andsystems explained hereinafter. Video Processor 202 generates analogand/or digital video signals which are displayed on LCD 201. ROM 207stores the data and programs which are essential to operateCommunication Device 200. Wireless signals are received by Antenna 218and processed by Signal Processor 208. Input signals are input by InputDevice 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick, and/or a keypad, and thesignals are transferred via Input Interface 209 and Data Bus 203 to CPU211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which is designed to output differentcolors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc). Analog audio data is input toMicrophone 215. A/D 213 converts the analog audio data into a digitalformat. Speaker 216 outputs analog audio data which is converted into ananalog format from digital format by D/A 204. Sound Processor 205produces digital audio signals that are transferred to D/A 204 and alsoprocesses the digital audio signals transferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit214 captures video image which is stored in RAM 206 in a digital format.Vibrator 217 vibrates the entire device by the command from CPU 211.

As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/Video Processor 202 may beseparated from the other elements described in FIG. 1, and be connectedin a wireless fashion to be wearable and/or head-mountable.

When Communication Device 200 is in the voice communication mode, theanalog audio data input to Microphone 215 is converted to a digitalformat by A/D 213 and transmitted to another device via Antenna 218 in awireless fashion after being processed by Signal Processor 208, and thewireless signal representing audio data which is received via Antenna218 is output from Speaker 216 after being processed by Signal Processor208 and converted to analog signal by D/A 204. For the avoidance ofdoubt, the definition of Communication Device 200 in this specificationincludes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition of Communication Device 200also includes in this specification any device which is mobile and/orportable and which is capable to send and/or receive audio data, textdata, image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218. The definition of Communication Device 200further includes any micro device embedded or installed into devices andequipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder, heater, air conditioner, fan,clock, micro wave oven, dish washer, refrigerator, oven, washingmachine, dryer, door, window, automobile, motorcycle, and modem) toremotely control these devices and equipments. The size of CommunicationDevice 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device 200 may be installed inhouses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships, submarines, airplanes, andspaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the elements of Communication Device 200.The elements of Communication Device 200 described in this paragraph isidentical to the ones described in FIG. 1, except Communication Device200 has new element, i.e., LED 219. Here, LED 219 receives infra redsignals from other wireless devices, which are transferred to CPU 211via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sends infra red signals in a wirelessfashion which are composed by CPU 211 and transferred via Data Bus 203.As the second embodiment, LED 219 may be connected to Signal Processor208. Here, LED 219 transfers the received infra red signals to SignalProcessor 208, and Signal Processor 208 processes and converts thesignals to a CPU readable format which are transferred to CPU 211 viaData Bus 203. The data produced by CPU 211 are processed by SignalProcessor 208 and transferred to another device via LED 219 in awireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as same as that of Antenna 218described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizes infra red signals forimplementing wireless communication in the second embodiment. For theavoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g., referring to FIG. 1in parenthesis) automatically refers to this paragraph in thisspecification.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the data stored in Host H. In the presentembodiment, Host H includes Host Information Storage Area H00 a whichstores various types of data to assist and/or co-operate withCommunication Device 200 to implement all modes, functions, and systemsdescribed in this specification. As another embodiment, Host H may becomposed of a plurality of computers, i.e., one master computer and aplurality of slave computers, wherein the master computer is connectedto the plurality of slave computers. As another embodiment, Host H mayalso be composed of a plurality of master computers by way of utilizingpeer-to-peer connection.

<<Voice Recognition System>>

Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1) has the function to operate the deviceby the user's voice or convert the user's voice into a text format(i.e., the voice recognition). The voice recognition function can beperformed in terms of software by using Area 261, the voice recognitionworking area, of RAM 206 (FIG. 1) which is specifically allocated toperform such function, or can also be performed in terms of hardwarecircuit where such space is specifically allocated in Area 282 of SoundProcessor 205 (FIG. 1) for the voice recognition system.

This paragraph illustrates how the voice recognition function isactivated. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks the input status ofInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S1). If CPU 211 detects a specific signalinput from Input Device 210 (S2) the voice recognition system isactivated. As another embodiment, the voice recognition system can alsobe activated by entering predetermined phrase, such as ‘start voicerecognition system’ via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1).

<<Voice Recognition—Dialing/Auto-Off During Call Function>>

This paragraph illustrates the operation of the voice recognition in thepresent invention. Once the voice recognition system is activated (S1)the analog audio data is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S2). Theanalog audio data is converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1)(S3). The digital audio data is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) to retrieve the text and numeric information therefrom (S4).Then the numeric information is retrieved (S5) and displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S6). If the retrieved numeric information is not correct (S7),the user can input the correct numeric information manually by usingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S8). Once the sequence of inputting thenumeric information is completed and after the confirmation process isover (S9), the entire numeric information is displayed on LCD 201 andthe sound is output from Speaker 216 under control of CPU 211 (S10). Ifthe numeric information is correct (S11), Communication Device 200(FIG. 1) initiates the dialing process by utilizing the numericinformation (S12). The dialing process continues until CommunicationDevice 200 is connected to another device (S13). Once CPU 211 detectsthat the line is connected it automatically deactivates the voicerecognition system (S14).

CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks the status of Communication Device 200periodically (S1) and remains the voice recognition system offlineduring call (S2). If the connection is severed, i.e., user hangs up,then CPU 211 reactivates the voice recognition system (S3).

<<Voice Recognition Tag Function>>

The following paragraphs describe the method of inputting the numericinformation in a convenient manner.

In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Table #1 and Table #2. Audioinformation #1 corresponds to tag ‘Scott.’ Namely audio information,such as wave data, which represents the sound of ‘Scott’ (sounds like‘S-ko-t’) is registered in Table #1, which corresponds to tag ‘Scott’.In the same manner audio information #2 corresponds to tag ‘Carol’;audio information #3 corresponds to tag ‘Peter’; audio information #4corresponds to tag ‘Amy’; and audio information #5 corresponds to tag‘Brian.’ Tag ‘Scott’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(916)411-2526’; tag ‘Carol’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(418)675-6566’; tag ‘Peter’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(220)890-1567’; tag ‘Amy’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(615)125-3411’; and tag ‘Brian’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(042)645-2097.’ Once the audio data is processed as described in S4hereinbefore, CPU 211 scans Table #1 (S1). If the retrieved audio datamatches with one of the audio information registered in Table #1 (S2),CPU 211 scans Table #2 (S3) and retrieves the corresponding numericinformation from Table #2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the present invention.Here, RAM 206 includes Table #A instead of Table #1 and Table #2described above. In this embodiment, audio info #1 (i.e., wave datawhich represents the sound of ‘Scot’) directly corresponds to numericinformation ‘(916) 411-2526.’ In the same manner audio info #2corresponds to numeric information ‘(410) 675-6566’; audio info #3corresponds to numeric information ‘(220) 890-1567’; audio info #4corresponds to numeric information ‘(615) 125-3411’; and audio info #5corresponds to numeric information ‘(042) 645-2097.’ Once the audio datais processed as described in S4 hereinbefore, CPU 211 scans Table #A(S1). If the retrieved audio data matches with one of the audioinformation registered in Table #A (S2), it retrieves the correspondingnumeric information therefrom (S3).

As another embodiment, RAM 206 may contain only Table #2 and tag can beretrieved from the voice recognition system explained hereinbefore.Namely, once the audio data is processed by CPU 211 (FIG. 1) asdescribed in S4 hereinbefore and retrieves the text data therefrom anddetects one of the tags registered in Table #2 (e.g., ‘Scot’), CPU 211retrieves the corresponding numeric information (e.g., ‘(916) 411-2526’)from the same table.

<<Voice Recognition Noise Filtering Function>>

The following paragraphs describe the method of minimizing the undesiredeffect of the background noise when utilizing the voice recognitionsystem.

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 255 and Area 256.Sound audio data which represents background noise is stored in Area255, and sound audio data which represents the beep, ringing sound andother sounds which are emitted from the Communication Device 200 arestored in Area 256.

This paragraph describes the method to utilize the data stored in Area255 and Area 256 described hereinbefore. When the voice recognitionsystem is activated as described hereinbefore, the analog audio data isinput from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). The analog audio data isconverted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audiodata is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3) and compared tothe data stored in Area 255 and Area 256 (S4). Such comparison can bedone by either Sound Processor 205 or CPU 211 (FIG. 1). If the digitalaudio data matches to the data stored in Area 255 and/or Area 256, thefiltering process is initiated and the matched portion of the digitalaudio data is deleted as background noise. Such sequence of process isdone before retrieving text and numeric information from the digitalaudio data.

This paragraph describes the method of updating Area 255. When the voicerecognition system is activated as described hereinbefore, the analogaudio data is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). The analog audiodata is converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). Thedigital audio data is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) or CPU211 (FIG. 1) (S3) and the background noise is captured (S4). CPU 211(FIG. 1) scans Area 255 and if the captured background noise is notregistered in Area 255, it updates the sound audio data stored therein(S5).

This paragraph describes another embodiment of the present invention.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) routinely checks whether the voice recognition systemis activated (S1). If the system is activated (S2), the beep, ringingsound, and other sounds which are emitted from Communication Device 200are automatically turned off in order to minimize the miss recognitionprocess of the voice recognition system (S3).

<<Voice Recognition Auto-Off Function>>

The voice recognition system can be automatically turned off to avoidglitch. When the voice recognition system is activated (S1), CPU 211(FIG. 1) automatically sets a timer (S2). The value of timer (i.e., thelength of time until the system is deactivated) can be set manually bythe user. The timer is incremented periodically (S3), and if theincremented time equals to the predetermined value of time as set in S2(S4), the voice recognition system is automatically deactivated (S5).

<<Voice Recognition Email Function (1)>>

This paragraph illustrates the first embodiment of the function oftyping and sending e-mails by utilizing the voice recognition system.Once the voice recognition system is activated (S1), the analog audiodata is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S2). The analog audio datais converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S3). The digitalaudio data is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) or CPU 211(FIG. 1) to retrieve the text and numeric information therefrom (S4).The text and numeric information are retrieved (S5) and are displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S6). If the retrieved information is not correct (S7),the user can input the correct text and/or numeric information manuallyby using the Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S8). If inputting the text andnumeric information is completed (S9) and CPU 211 detects input signalfrom Input Device 210 to send the e-mail (S10), the dialing process isinitiated (S11). The dialing process is repeated until CommunicationDevice 200 is connected to Host H (S12), and the e-mail is sent to thedesignated address (S13).

<<Voice Recognition—Speech-to-Text Function>>

The next paragraph illustrates the speech-to-text function ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Once Communication Device 200 receives a transmitted data from anotherdevice via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1), Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1)processes the data (e.g., wireless signal error check and decompression)(S2), and the transmitted data is converted into digital audio data(S3). Such conversion can be rendered by either CPU 211 (FIG. 1) orSignal Processor 208. The digital audio data is transferred to SoundProcessor 205 (FIG. 1) via Data Bus 203 and text and numeric informationare retrieved therefrom (S4). CPU 211 designates the predetermined fontand color to the text and numeric information (S5) and also designates atag to such information (S6). After these tasks are completed the tagand the text and numeric information are stored in RAM 206 and displayedon LCD 201 (S7).

This paragraph illustrates how the text and numeric information as wellas the tag are displayed. On LCD 201 the text and numeric information702 (‘XXXXXXXXX’) are displayed with the predetermined font and color aswell as with the tag 701 (‘John’).

<<Audio/Video Data Capturing System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audio/video capturing system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Assuming that Device A, a Communication Device 200, captures audio/videodata and transfers such data to Device B, another Communication Device200, via a host (not shown). Primarily video data is input from CCD Unit214 (FIG. 1) and audio data is input from Microphone 215 of (FIG. 1) ofDevice A.

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 267 which storesvideo data, Area 268 which stores audio data, and Area 265 which is awork area utilized for the process explained hereinafter.

In this embodiment, the video data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1)(Sla) is converted from analog data to digital data (S2 a) and isprocessed by Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S3 a). Area 265 is used aswork area for such process. The processed video data is stored in Area267 of RAM 206 (S4 a) and is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S5 a). Theaudio data input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (Sib) is converted fromanalog data to digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2 b) and is processedby Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3 b). Area 265 is used as work areafor such process. The processed audio data is stored in Area 268 of RAM206 (S4 b) and is transferred to Sound Processor 205 and is output fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) via D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S5 b). The sequences of Slathrough S5 a and S1 b through S5 b are continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or by the voice recognition system (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence to transfer the video data andthe audio data via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion. CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Device A initiates a dialing process (S1) until the line isconnected to a host (not shown) (S2). As soon as the line is connected,CPU 211 reads the video data and the audio data stored in Area 267 andArea 268 (S3) and transfer them to Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) wherethe data are converted into a transferring data (S4). The transferringdata is transferred from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion(S5). The sequence of S1 through S5 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via the voice recognition system (S6). The line is disconnectedthereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the basic structure of the transferred datawhich is transferred from Device A as described in S4 and S5hereinbefore. Transferred data 610 is primarily composed of Header 611,video data 612, audio data 613, relevant data 614, and Footer 615. Videodata 612 corresponds to the video data stored in Area 267 of RAM 206,and audio data 613 corresponds to the audio data stored in Area 268 ofRAM 206. Relevant Data 614 includes various types of data, such as theidentification numbers of Device A (i.e., transferor device) and DeviceB (i.e., the transferee device), a location data which represents thelocation of Device A, email data transferred from Device A to Device B,etc. Header 611 and Footer 615 represent the beginning and the end ofTransferred Data 610 respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the data contained in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) ofDevice B. RAM 206 includes Area 269 which stores video data, Area 270which stores audio data, and Area 266 which is a work area utilized forthe process explained hereinafter.

In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Device B initiates a dialingprocess (S1) until Device B is connected to a host (not shown) (S2).Transferred Data 610 is received by Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) of Device B(S3) and is converted by Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) into datareadable by CPU 211 (S4). Video data and audio data are retrieved fromTransferred Data 610 and stored into Area 269 and Area 270 of RAM 206respectively (S5). The video data stored in Area 269 is processed byVideo Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S6 a). The processed video data isconverted into an analog data (S7 a) and displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S8 a). S7 a may not be necessary depending on the type of LCD 201 used.The audio data stored in Area 270 is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) (S6 b). The processed audio data is converted into analog databy D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S7 b) and output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S8 b).The sequences of S6 a through S8 a and S6 b through S8 b are continueduntil a specific signal indicating to stop such sequence is input fromInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via the voice recognition system (S9).

<<Caller ID System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the caller ID system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Table C. Each phone numbercorresponds to a specific color and sound. For example Phone #1corresponds to Color A and Sound E; Phone #2 corresponds to Color B andSound F; Phone #3 corresponds to Color C and Sound G; and Phone #4corresponds to color D and Sound H.

In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects orinputs a phone number (S1) and selects a specific color (S2) and aspecific sound (S3) designated for that phone number by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1). Such sequence can be repeated until there is aspecific input signal from Input Device 210 ordering to do otherwise(S4).

In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks whether it hasreceived a call from other communication devices (S1). If it receives acall (S2), CPU 211 scans Table C to see whether the phone number of thecaller device is registered in the table (S3). If there is a match (S4),the designated color is output from Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) and thedesignated sound is output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S5). For exampleif the incoming call is from Phone #1, Color A is output from Indicator212 and Sound E is output from Speaker 216.

<<Call Blocking Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the so-called ‘call blocking’function of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 273 and Area 274.Area 273 stores phone numbers that should be blocked. In thisembodiment, Phone #1, Phone #2, and Phone #3 are blocked. Area 274stores a message data, preferably a wave data, stating that the phonecan not be connected.

This paragraph illustrates the operation of Communication Device 200.When Communication Device 200 receives a call (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)scans Area 273 of RAM 206 (S2). If the phone number of the incoming callmatches one of the phone numbers stored in Area 273 (S3), CPU 211 sendsthe message data stored in Area 274 of RAM 206 to the caller device (S4)and disconnects the line (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the method of updating Area 273 of RAM 206.Assuming that the phone number of the incoming call does not match anyof the phone numbers stored in Area 273 of RAM 206 (see S3hereinbefore). In that case, Communication Device 200 is connected tothe caller device. However, the user of Communication Device 200 maydecide to have such number ‘blocked’ after all. If that is the case, theuser dials ‘999’ while the line is connected. Technically CPU 211(FIG. 1) periodically checks the signals input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). If the input signal represents a numerical data ‘999’from Input Device 210 (S2), CPU 211 adds the phone number of the pendingcall to Area 273 (S3) and sends the message data stored in Area 274 ofRAM 206 to the caller device (S4). The line is disconnected thereafter(S5).

The following paragraphs illustrate another embodiment of the presentinvention.

In this embodiment, Host H (not shown) includes Area 403 and Area 404.Area 403 stores phone numbers that should be blocked to be connected toCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, Phone #1, Phone #2, andPhone #3 are blocked for Device A; Phone #4, Phone #5, and Phone #6 areblocked for Device B; and Phone #7, Phone #8, and Phone #9 are blockedfor Device C. Area 404 stores a message data stating that the phone cannot be connected.

This paragraph illustrates the operation of Host H (not shown). Assumingthat the caller device is attempting to connect to Device B,Communication Device 200. Host H periodically checks the signals fromall Communication Device 200 (S1). If Host H detects a call for Device B(S2), it scans Area 403 (S3) and checks whether the phone number of theincoming call matches one of the phone numbers stored therein for DeviceB (S4). If the phone number of the incoming call does not match any ofthe phone numbers stored in Area 403, the line is connected to Device B(S5 b). On the other hand, if the phone number of the incoming callmatches one of the phone numbers stored in Area 403, the line is‘blocked,’ i.e., not connected to Device B (S5 a) and Host H sends themassage data stored in Area 404 to the caller device (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the method of updating Area 403 of Host H.Assuming that the phone number of the incoming call does not match anyof the phone numbers stored in Area 403 (see S4 described hereinbefore).In that case, Host H allows the connection between the caller device andCommunication Device 200, however, the user of Communication Device 200may decide to have such number ‘blocked’ after all. If that is the case,the user simply dials ‘999’ while the line is connected. TechnicallyHost H periodically checks the signals input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). If the input signal represents ‘999’ from Input Device210 (FIG. 1) (S2), Host H adds the phone number of the pending call toArea 403 (S3) and sends the message data stored in Area 404 to thecaller device (S4). The line is disconnected thereafter (S5).

As another embodiment of the method illustrated in the previousparagraph, Host H may delegate some of its tasks to Communication Device200. Namely, Communication Device 200 periodically checks the signalsinput from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). If the input signal represents anumeric data ‘999’ from Input Device 210, Communication Device 200 sendsto Host H a block request signal as well as with the phone number of thepending call. Host H, upon receiving the block request signal fromCommunication Device 200, adds the phone number of the pending call toArea 403 and sends the message data stored in Area 404 to the callerdevice. The line is disconnected thereafter.

<<Navigation System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the navigation system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 275, Area 276, Area277, and Area 295. Area 275 stores a plurality of map data,two-dimensional (2D) image data, which are designed to be displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). Area 276 stores a plurality of object data,three-dimensional (3D) image data, which are also designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201. The object data are primarily displayed by amethod so-called ‘texture mapping’ which is explained in detailshereinafter. Here, the object data include the three-dimensional data ofvarious types of objects that are displayed on LCD 201, such as bridges,houses, hotels, motels, inns, gas stations, restaurants, streets,traffic lights, street signs, trees, etc. Area 277 stores a plurality oflocation data, i.e., data representing the locations of the objectsstored in Area 276. Area 277 also stores a plurality of datarepresenting the street address of each object stored in Area 276. Inaddition, Area 277 stores the current position data of CommunicationDevice 200 and the Destination Data which are explained in detailshereafter. The map data stored in Area 275 and the location data storedin Area 277 are linked each other. Area 295 stores a plurality ofattribution data attributing to the map data stored in Area 275 andlocation data stored in Area 277, such as road blocks, trafficaccidents, and road constructions, and traffic jams. The attributiondata stored in Area 295 is updated periodically by receiving an updateddata from a host (not shown).

In this embodiment, Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) includes texturemapping processor 290. Texture mapping processor 290 produces polygonsin a three-dimensional space and ‘pastes’ textures to each polygon. Theconcept of such method is described in the following patents and thereferences cited thereof: U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,870,101, 6,157,384,5,774,125, 5,375,206, and/or 5,925,127.

In this embodiment, the voice recognition system is activated when CPU211 (FIG. 1) detects a specific signal input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). After the voice recognition system is activated, theinput current position mode starts and the current position ofCommunication Device 200 is input by voice recognition system (S2). Thecurrent position can also be input from Input Device 210. As anotherembodiment of the present invention, the current position canautomatically be detected by the method so-called ‘global positioningsystem’ or ‘GPS’ and input the current data therefrom. After the processof inputting the current data is completed, the input destination modestarts and the destination is input by the voice recognition systemexplained above or by the Input Device 210 (S3), and the voicerecognition system is deactivated after the process of inputting theDestination Data is completed by utilizing such system (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the input current positionmode described in S2 described hereinbefore. When analog audio data isinput from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1), such data is converted intodigital audio data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audio data isprocessed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) to retrieve text and numericdata therefrom (S3). The retrieved data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S4). The data can be corrected by repeating the sequence of S1 throughS4 until the correct data is displayed (S5). If the correct data isdisplayed, such data is registered as current position data (S6). Asstated above, the current position data can be input manually by InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) and/or can be automatically input by utilizing themethod so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ as describedhereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the input destination modedescribed in S3 described hereinbefore. When analog audio data is inputfrom Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1), such data is converted into digitalaudio data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audio data is processedby Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) to retrieve text and numeric datatherefrom (S3). The retrieved data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S4). The data can be corrected by repeating the sequence of S1 throughS4 until the correct data is displayed on LCD 201 (S5). If the correctdata is displayed, such data is registered as Destination Data (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of displaying the shortest routefrom the current position to the destination. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrievesboth the current position data and the Destination Data which are inputby the method described hereinbefore from Area 277 of RAM 206 (FIG. 1).By utilizing the location data of streets, bridges, traffic lights andother relevant data, CPU 211 calculates the shortest route to thedestination (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevant two-dimensionalmap data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area 275 of RAM 206(S2).

As another embodiment of the present invention, by way of utilizing thelocation data stored in Area 277, CPU 211 may produce athree-dimensional map by composing the three dimensional objects (bymethod so-called ‘texture mapping’ as described above) which are storedin Area 276 of RAM 206. The two-dimensional map and/or the threedimensional map is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

As another embodiment of the present invention, the attribution datastored in Area 295 of RAM 206 may be utilized. Namely if any road block,traffic accident, road construction, and/or traffic jam is included inthe shortest route calculated by the method mentioned above, CPU 211(FIG. 1) calculates the second shortest route to the destination. If thesecond shortest route still includes road block, traffic accident, roadconstruction, and/or traffic jam, CPU 211 calculates the third shortestroute to the destination. CPU 211 calculates repeatedly until thecalculated route does not include any road block, traffic accident, roadconstruction, and/or traffic jam. The shortest route to the destinationis highlighted by a significant color (such as red) to enable the userof Communication Device 200 to easily recognize such route on LCD 201(FIG. 1).

As another embodiment of the present invention, an image which issimilar to the one which is observed by the user in the real world maybe displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by utilizing the three-dimensionalobject data. In order to produce such image, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) identifiesthe present location and retrieves the corresponding location data fromArea 277 of RAM 206. Then CPU 211 retrieves a plurality of object datawhich correspond to such location data from Area 276 of RAM 206 anddisplays a plurality of objects on LCD 201 based on such object data ina manner the user of Communication Device 200 may observe from thecurrent location.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of updating the shortest routeto the destination while Communication Device 200 is moving. By way ofperiodically and automatically inputting the current position by themethod so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ as describedhereinbefore, the current position is continuously updated (S1). Byutilizing the location data of streets and traffic lights and otherrelevant data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) recalculates the shortest route to thedestination (S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevant two-dimensionalmap data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area 275 of RAM 206(S3). Instead, by way of utilizing the location data stored in Area 277,CPU 211 may produce a three-dimensional map by composing the threedimensional objects by method so-called ‘texture mapping’ which arestored in Area 276 of RAM 206. The two-dimensional map and/or thethree-dimensional map is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4). Theshortest route to the destination is re-highlighted by a significantcolor (such as red) to enable the user of Communication Device 200 toeasily recognize the updated route on LCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the method of finding the shortest locationof the desired facility, such as restaurant, hotel, gas station, etc.The voice recognition system is activated in the manner describedhereinbefore (S1). By way of utilizing the voice recognition system, acertain type of facility is selected from the options displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). The prepared options can be a) restaurant, b) lodge, andc) gas station (S2). Once one of the options is selected, CPU 211(FIG. 1) calculates and inputs the current position by the methoddescribed hereinbefore (S3). From the data selected in S2, CPU 211 scansArea 277 of RAM 206 and searches the location of the facilities of theselected category (such as restaurant) which is the closest to thecurrent position (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevanttwo-dimensional map data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area275 of RAM 206 (S5). Instead, by way of utilizing the location datastored in 277, CPU 211 may produce a three-dimensional map by composingthe three dimensional objects by method so-called ‘texture mapping’which are stored in Area 276 of RAM 206. The two-dimensional map and/orthe three dimensional map is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S6). Theshortest route to the destination is re-highlighted by a significantcolor (such as red) to enable the user of Communication Device 200 toeasily recognize the updated route on LCD 201. The voice recognitionsystem is deactivated thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the method of displaying the time anddistance to the destination. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the currentposition wherein the source data can be input from the method describedhereinbefore (S1). The distance is calculated from the method describedhereinbefore (S2). The speed is calculated from the distance whichCommunication Device 200 has proceeded within specific period of time(S3). The distance to the destination and the time left are displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4 and S5).

This paragraph illustrates the method of warning and giving instructionswhen the user of Communication Device 200 deviates from the correctroute. By way of periodically and automatically inputting the currentposition by the method so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ asdescribed hereinbefore, the current position is continuously updated(S1). If the current position deviates from the correct route (S2), awarning is given from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) and/or on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). The method is repeated for a certain period of time. If thedeviation still exists after such period of time has passed, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the sequence described hereinbefore and calculatesthe shortest route to the destination and display it on LCD 201. Thedetails of such sequence is as same as the one explained hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the overall operation of Communication Device200 regarding the navigation system and the communication system. WhenCommunication Device 200 receives data from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) determines whether the data is navigation data, i.e.,data necessary to operate the navigation system (S2). If the datareceived is a navigation data, the navigation system describedhereinbefore is performed (S3). On the other hand, if the data receivedis a communication data (S4), the communication system, i.e., the systemnecessary for wireless communication which is mainly described in FIG. 1is performed (S5).

<<Auto Time Adjust Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the automatic time adjust function,i.e., a function which automatically adjusts the clock of CommunicationDevice 200.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, RAM 206 includes Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069a, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b, and Auto Time Data StorageArea 2069 c. Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069 a storessoftware program to implement the present function which is explained indetails hereinafter, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b stores thedata which represents the current time, and Auto Time Data Storage Area2069 c is a working area assigned for implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates a software program stored in Auto Time AdjustSoftware Storage Area 2069 a. First of all, Communication Device 200 isconnected to Network NT (e.g., the Internet) via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves an atomic clock data from NetworkNT (S2) and the current time data from Current Time Data Storage Area2069 b, and compares both data. If the difference between both data isnot within the predetermined value X (S3), CPU 211 adjusts the currenttime data (S4). The method to adjust the current data can be eithersimply overwrite the data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b with the atomic clock data retrieved from Network NT or calculate thedifference of the two data and add or subtract the difference to or fromthe current time data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b byutilizing Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c as a working area.

This paragraph illustrates another software program stored in Auto TimeAdjust Software Storage Area 2069 a. When the power of CommunicationDevice 200 is turned on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores a predeterminedtimer value in Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c (S2). The timer valueis decremented periodically (S3). When the timer value equals to zero(S4), the automatic timer adjust function is activated (S5) and CPU 211performs the sequence described hereinbefore, and the sequence of S2through S4 is repeated thereafter.

<<Calculator Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the calculator function ofCommunication Device 200. Communication Device 200 can be utilized as acalculator to perform mathematical calculation by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep, and the calculator function is activated (S3 c) when thecalculator function is selected in the previous step. The modesdisplayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may includeall functions and modes explained in this specification. Once theselected mode is activated, another mode can be activated while thefirst activated mode is still implemented by going through the steps ofS1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previous paragraph) and to perform the calculator function isstored in Calculator Information Storage Area 20615 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Calculator InformationStorage Area 20615 a. In this embodiment, Calculator Information StorageArea 20615 a includes Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b andCalculator Data Storages Area 20615 c. Calculator Software Storage Area20615 b stores the software programs to implement the present function,such as the one explained hereinafter, and Calculator Data Storage Area20615 c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute the softwareprograms stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b and toimplement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in CalculatorStorage Area 20615 b. In this embodiment, one or more of numeric dataare input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system as well as the arithmetic operators (e.g., ‘+’, ‘−’,and ‘x’), which are temporarily stored in Calculator Data Storage Area20615 c (S1). By utilizing the data stored in Calculator Data StorageArea 20615 c, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs the calculation by executing thesoftware program stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b(S2). The result of the calculation is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)thereafter (S3).

<<Spreadsheet Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the spreadsheet function ofCommunication Device 200. Here, the spreadsheet is composed of aplurality of cells which are aligned in matrix. In other words, thespreadsheet is divided into a plurality of rows and columns in whichalphanumeric data is capable to be input. Microsoft Excel is the typicalexample of the spreadsheet.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep, and the spreadsheet function is activated (S3 c) when thespreadsheet function is selected in the previous step. The modesdisplayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may includeall functions and modes explained in this specification. Once theselected mode is activated, another mode can be activated while thefirst activated mode is still implemented by going through the steps ofS1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previous paragraph) and to perform the spreadsheet function isstored in Spreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Spreadsheet InformationStorage Area 20616 a. In this embodiment, Spreadsheet InformationStorage Area 20616 a includes Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 band Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616 c. Spreadsheet Software StorageArea 20616 b stores the software programs to implement the presentfunction, such as the one explained hereinafter, and Spreadsheet DataStorage Area 20616 c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute thesoftware programs stored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 band to implement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SpreadsheetSoftware Storage Area 20616 b. In this embodiment, a certain cell of aplurality of cells displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Theselected cell is highlighted by a certain manner, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1)stores the location of the selected cell in Spreadsheet Data StorageArea 20616 c (S1). One or more of alphanumeric data are input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system into the cellselected in S1, and CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data in SpreadsheetData Storage Area 20616 c (S2). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric dataon LCD 201 thereafter (S3). The sequence of S1 through S3 can berepeated for a numerous amount of times and saved and closed thereafter.

<<Word Processing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the word processing function ofCommunication Device 200. By way of implementing such function,Communication Device 200 can be utilized as a word processor which hasthe similar functions to Microsoft Words. The word processing functionprimarily includes the following functions: the bold formattingfunction, the italic formatting function, the image pasting function,the font formatting function, the spell check function, the underliningfunction, the page numbering function, and the bullets and numberingfunction. Here, the bold formatting function makes the selectedalphanumeric data bold. The italic formatting function makes theselected alphanumeric data italic. The image pasting function pastes theselected image to a document to the selected location. The fontformatting function changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font. The spell check function fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in the document. The underliningfunction adds underlines to the selected alphanumeric data. The pagenumbering function adds page numbers to each page of a document at theselected location. The bullets and numbering function adds the selectedtype of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphs.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinafter, and the wordprocessing function is activated (S3 c) when the word processingfunction is selected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functionsand modes explained in this specification. Once the selected mode isactivated, another mode can be activated while the first activated modeis still implemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 foranother mode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are describedhereinafter, and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the word processing function isstored in Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word ProcessingInformation Storage Area 20617 a. Word Processing Information StorageArea 20617 a includes Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617 b andWord Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c. Word processing SoftwareStorage Area 20617 b stores the software programs described hereinafter,and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c stores a plurality of datadescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in WordProcessing Software Storage Area 20617 b. Word Processing SoftwareStorage Area 20617 b stores Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1,Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2, Italic Formatting Software 20617 b3, Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4, Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5,Spell Check Software 20617 b 6, Underlining Software 20617 b 7, PageNumbering Software 20617 b 8, and Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b9. Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1 inputs to a document aseries of alphanumeric data in accordance to the input signals producedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2 implements the bold formattingfunction which makes the selected alphanumeric data bold of which thesequence is described hereinafter. Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3implements the italic formatting function which makes the selectedalphanumeric data italic of which the sequence is described hereinafter.Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4 implements the image pasting functionwhich pastes the selected image to a document to the selected locationof which the sequence is described hereinafter. Font Formatting Software20617 b 5 implements the font formatting function which changes theselected alphanumeric data to the selected font of which the sequence isdescribed hereinafter. Spell Check Software 20617 b 6 implements thespell check function which fixes spelling and grammatical errors of thealphanumeric data in a document of which the sequence is describedhereinafter. Underlining Software 20617 b 7 implements the underliningfunction which adds the selected underlines to the selected alphanumericdata of which the sequence is described hereinafter. Page NumberingSoftware 20617 b 8 implements the page numbering function which addspage numbers at the selected location to each page of a document ofwhich the sequence is described hereinafter. Bullets And NumberingSoftware 20617 b 9 implements the bullets and numbering function whichadds the selected type of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphsof which the sequence is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word Processing DataStorage Area 20617 c. Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c includesAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617 c 1, Bold Formatting Data StorageArea 20617 c 2, Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 3, ImageData Storage Area 20617 c 4, Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c5, Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6, Underlining Data StorageArea 20617 c 7, Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 8, and BulletsAnd Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9. Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20617 c 1 stores the basic text and numeric data which are notdecorated by bold and/or italic (the default font may be courier new).Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2 stores the text and numericdata which are decorated by bold. Italic Formatting Data Storage Area20617 c 3 stores the text and numeric data which are decorated byitalic. Image Data Storage Area 20617 c 4 stores the data representingthe location of the image data pasted in a document and the image dataitself. Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5 stores a pluralityof types of fonts, such as anal, century, courier new, tahoma, and timesnew roman, of all text and numeric data stored in Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20617 c 1. Spell check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6 stores aplurality of spell check data, i.e., a plurality of correct text andnumeric data for purposes of being compared with the alphanumeric datainput in a document and a plurality of pattern data for purposes ofchecking the grammatical errors therein. Underlining Data Storage Area20617 c 7 stores a plurality of data representing underlines ofdifferent types. Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 8 stores thedata representing the location of page numbers to be displayed in adocument and the page number of each page of a document. Bullets AndNumbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9 stores a plurality of datarepresenting different types of bullets and numbering and the locationwhich they are added.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1. A plurality ofalphanumeric data is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). The corresponding alphanumeric data isretrieved from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617 c 1 (S2), and thedocument including the alphanumeric data retrieved in S2 is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2. One or more of alphanumeric dataare selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, a bold formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thebold formatting data from Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2(S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the boldformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replacedbold formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3. One or more of alphanumericdata are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, an italic formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves theitalic formatting data from Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c3 (S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with theitalic formatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with thereplaced italic formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4. The image to be pasted is selectedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Here, the image may be of any type, such as JPEG, GIF, and TIFF.Next the location in a document where the image is to be pasted isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system(S2). The data representing the location is stored in Image Pasting DataStorage Area 20617 c 4. The image is pasted at the location selected inS2 and the image is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617 c 4(S3). The document with the pasted image is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5. One or more of alphanumeric dataare selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, a font formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thefont formatting data from Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5(S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the fontformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replacedfont formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Spell Check Software 20617 b 6. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans allalphanumeric data in a document (S1). CPU 211 then compares thealphanumeric data with the spell check data stored in Spell Check DataStorage Area 20617 c 6, i.e., a plurality of correct text and numericdata for purposes of being compared with the alphanumeric data input ina document and a plurality of pattern data for purposes of checking thegrammatical errors therein (S2). CPU 211 corrects the alphanumeric dataand/or corrects the grammatical errors (S3), and the document with thecorrected alphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Underlining Software 20617 b 7. One or more of alphanumeric data areselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). Next, an underlining signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) or via voicerecognition system to select the type of the underline to be added (S2).CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the underlining data from UnderliningData Storage Area 20617 c 7 (S3), and adds to the alphanumeric dataselected in S1 (S4). The document with underlines added to the selectedalphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Page Numbering Software 20617 b 8. A page numbering signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Next, the location to display the page number is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then stores the location of the page number to be displayed inPage Numbering Storage Area 20617 c 8, and adds the page number to eachpage of a document at the selected location (S3). The document with pagenumbers is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b 9. A paragraph is selected byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Next, the type of the bullets and/or numbering is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then stores the identification data of the paragraph selectedin S1 and the type of the bullets and/or numbering in Bullets AndNumbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9, and adds the bullets and/ornumbering to the selected paragraph of a document (S3). The documentwith the bullets and/or numbering is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter(S4).

<<Start Up Software Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the start up software programfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to automaticallyactivate (or start up) the registered software programs when the poweris on.

This paragraph illustrates the overall sequence of the present function.The user of Communication Device 200 presses the power button ofCommunication Device 200 (S1). Then the predetermined software programsautomatically activate (or start up) without having any instructionsfrom the user of Communication Device 200 (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included RAM 206 (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Start Up Information Storage Area 20621 a which isdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621 a. Start Up Information Storage Area20621 a includes Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b and Start UpData Storage Area 20621 c. Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 cstores the data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Start UpSoftware Storage Area 20621 b. Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 bstores Power On Detecting Software 20621 b 1, Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621 b 2, and Start Up Software Activating Software20621 b 3. Power On Detecting Software 20621 b 1 detects whether thepower of Communication Device 200 is on of which the sequence isdescribed hereinafter, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621 b 2 identifies the software programs which are automaticallyactivated of which the sequence is described hereinafter, and Start UpSoftware Activating Software 20621 b 3 activates the identified softwareprograms identified by Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621 b 2 of which the sequence is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Start Up DataStorage Area 20621 c. Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 c includes StartUp Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1. Here, Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621 c 1 stores the software program indexes, wherein asoftware program index is an unique information assigned to eachsoftware program as an identifier (e.g., title of a software program) ofwhich the details are explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621 c 1. Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1stores the software program indexes of the software programs which areautomatically activated by the present function. Here, the softwareprograms may be any software programs explained in this specification.Three software program indexes, i.e., Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1a, Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1 b, and Start Up Software Index20621 c 1 c, are stored in Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c1 in the present example. The software program indexes can be createdand store in Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 manually byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Power On Detecting Software20621 b 1 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b. CPU 211(FIG. 1) checks the status of the power condition of CommunicationDevice 200 (S1). When the user of Communication Device 200 powers onCommunication Device 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such asby pressing a power button (S2), CPU 211 activates Start Up Data StorageArea Scanning Software 20621 b 2 of which the sequence is explainedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621 b 2 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area20621 b. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area20621 c 1 (S1), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S2). CPU 211 activates Start Up SoftwareActivating Software 20621 b 3 thereafter of which the sequence isexplained hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Software ActivatingSoftware 20621 b 3 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b. CPU211 (FIG. 1) activates the software programs of which the softwareprogram indexes are identified in S2 described hereinbefore (S1).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment wherein the three softwareprograms stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b (i.e., PowerOn Detecting Software 20621 b 1, Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621 b 2, Start Up Software Activating Software 20621 b 3) isintegrated into one software program stored therein. CPU 211 (FIG. 1)checks the status of the power condition of Communication Device 200(S1). When the user of Communication Device 200 powers on CommunicationDevice 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing apower button (S2), CPU 211 scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area20621 c 1 (S3), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S4). CPU 211 activates the software programsthereafter of which the software program indexes are identified in S4(S5).

As another embodiment, the software programs per se (not the softwareprogram indexes described hereinbefore may be stored in a specificstorage area which are activated by the present function.

As another embodiment, the present function may be implemented at thetime the user of Communication Device 200 logs on instead of at the timethe Communication Device 200 is powered as described in S2 describedhereinbefore.

<<Stereo Audio Data Output Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the stereo audio data outputfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to output audio datafrom Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereo fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host DataStorage Area H00 c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host Data Storage AreaH00 c includes Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22 a. Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22 a stores the software programs and datanecessary to implement the present function as described in detailshereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22 a. In this embodiment, Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22 a includes Stereo Audio Software StorageArea H22 b and Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c. Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area H22 b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the one described hereinafter.Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area H22 c. A plurality of stereo audio data are stored inStereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c. In this embodiment, three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1, Stereo Audio Data H22 c 2,and Stereo Audio Data H22 c 3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c. This paragraph describesthe components of Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1 as an example. In thisembodiment, Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1 includes Left Speaker Audio DataH22 c 1L, Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1R, and Stereo Audio DataOutput Timing Data H22 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L is anaudio data which is designed to be output from Speaker 216L. RightSpeaker Audio Data H22 c 1R is an audio data which is designed to beoutput from Speaker 216R. Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data H22 c 1Tis a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output of bothLeft Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1Rfrom Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b. In this embodiment, thesoftware program stored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 bextracts one of the stereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22 c and creates Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD forpurposes of transferring the extracted stereo audio data toCommunication Device 200 (S1).

This paragraph illustrates the components of Transferred Stereo AudioData TSAD created by the software program stored in Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area H22 b. In this embodiment, Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD is composed of Header TSAD1, Com Device ID TSAD2, HostID TSAD3, Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD4, and Footer TSAD5. ComDevice ID TSAD2 indicates the identification of Communication Device200, Host ID TSAD3 indicates the identification of Host H, andTransferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD4 is the stereo audio data extractedin the manner described hereinbefore. Header TSAD1 and Footer TSAD5indicate the beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Audio DataTSAD.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes StereoAudio Information Storage Area 20622 a. Stereo Audio Information StorageArea 20622 a stores the software programs and data necessary toimplement the present function as described in details hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622 a. In this embodiment, Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622 a includes Stereo Audio Software StorageArea 20622 b and Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c. Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area 20622 b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area 20622 c. A plurality of stereo audio data are storedin Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c. In this embodiment, threestereo audio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1, Stereo Audio Data20622 c 2, and Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c. This paragraphdescribes the components of Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 as an example.In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 includes Left SpeakerAudio Data 20622 c 1L, Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R, and StereoAudio Data Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c 1L is an audio data which is designed to be output from Speaker 216L.Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R is an audio data which is designedto be output from Speaker 216R. Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data20622 c 1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the outputof both Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data20622 c 1R from Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

The downloaded stereo audio data are stored in specific area(s) ofStereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of selecting and preparing tooutput the stereo audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereofashion. In this embodiment, a list of stereo audio data is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects onestereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). Assuming Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 isselected in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c 1L (S3), Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R (S4), and Stereo AudioData Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T from Stereo Audio Data Storage Area20622 c (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of outputting the stereo audiodata from Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereo fashion. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a specificsignal to output the stereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Assuming Audio Data 20622c 1 is selected in S2 described hereinbefore, CPU 211 outputs LeftSpeaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1Rfrom Speakers 216L and 216R respectively in a stereo fashion inaccordance with Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T (S2).

<<SOS Calling Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the SOS calling function whichenables Communication Device 200 to notify the police department thecurrent location of Communication Device 200 and the personalinformation of the user of Communication 200 when a 911 call is dialedfrom Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host InformationStorage Area H00 a. Host Information Storage Area H00 a includes SOSCalling Information Storage Area H29 a of which the data stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area H29 a. SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b and SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area H29 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter. SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in SOS Calling DataStorage Area H29 b. SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b includes PoliceDepartment Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 of which the data storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Police Department LocationData Storage Area H29 b 1. Police Department Location Data Storage AreaH29 b 1 includes three columns, i.e., Police Dept ID, Location Data, andPhone #. Police Dept ID represents the identification of a policedepartment (e.g., NYPD). Location Data represents the geographicallocation data (in x, y, z format) of the police department of thecorresponding Police Dept ID. Phone # represents the phone number of thepolice department of the corresponding Police Dept ID. In the presentexample, H29PD #1 is an identification of the police department of whichthe geographical location is H29LD #1 and of which the phone number isH29PN #1; H29PD #2 is an identification of the police department ofwhich the geographical location is H29LD #2 and of which the phonenumber is H29PN #2; H29PD #3 is an identification of the policedepartment of which the geographical location is H29LD #3 and of whichthe phone number is H29PN #3; and H29PD #4 is an identification of thepolice department of which the geographical location is H29LD #4 and ofwhich the phone number is H29PN #4.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200 as describedhereinafter may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. RAM 206 includes SOS Calling InformationStorage Area 20629 a of which the details are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area 20629 a. SOS Calling Information Storage Area20629 a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b and SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 bincludes data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described hereinafter. SOS Calling Software Storage Area 20629 cstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the one described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates storage areas included in SOS Calling DataStorage Area 20629 b. SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b includes GPSData Storage Area 20629 b 1 and User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2. GPSData Storage Area 20629 b 1 stores the data regarding the currentgeographical location produced by the method so-called GPS as describedhereinbefore. User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 stores the data regardingthe personal information of the user of Communication Device 200 asdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area20629 b 2. User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 includes User Data 20629UDwhich includes data regarding the personal information of the user ofCommunication Device 200. In the present example, User Data 20629UDcomprises Name, Age, Sex, Race, Blood Type, Home Address, and SSN. Namerepresents the name of the user of Communication Device 200; Agerepresents the age of the user of Communication Device 200; Sexrepresents the sex of the user of Communication Device 200; Racerepresents the race of the user of Communication Device 200; Blood Typerepresents the blood type of the user of Communication Device 200; HomeAddress represents the home address of the user of Communication Device200; and SSN represents the social security number of the user ofCommunication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c. When the user of Communication Device 200inputs 911 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the GPS data, i.e.,the current geographical location data by utilizing the method so-calledGPS as described hereinbefore (S2), and stores the GPS data in GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 (S3). CPU 211 then retrieves User Data 20629UDfrom User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 and the GPS data from GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 (S4), and composes SOS Data 20629SOS therefrom(S5), which is sent thereafter to Host H (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the elements of SOS Data 20629SOS. SOS Data20629SOS comprises Connection Request 20629CR, GPS Data 20629GD, andUser Data 20629UD. Connection Request 20629CR represents a request toHost H to forward the 911 call to a police department. GPS Data 20629GDis a data retrieved from GPS Data Storage Area 20629 b 1 as described inS4 described hereinbefore. User Data 20629UD is a data retrieved fromUser Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 as described in S4 describedhereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29 c of Host H. Host H periodically checks theincoming call (S1). If the incoming call is SOS Data 20629SOS (S2), HostH initiates the SOS calling process as described hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29 c of Host H. Host H retrieves GPS Data 20629GDfrom SOS Data 20629SOS (S1), and selects the closest police departmentby comparing GPS Data 20629GD and the data stored in column LocationData of Police Department Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 of Host H(S2). Host H then retrieves the corresponding phone number stored incolumn Phone # and connects the line between the corresponding policedepartment and Communication Device 200 in order to initiate a voicecommunication therebetween (S3). Host H forwards to the policedepartment thereafter GPS Data 20629GD and User Data 20629UD retrievedin S1 (S4).

As another embodiment, User Data 20629UD stored in User Data StorageArea 20629 b 2 may be stored in SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b ofHost H. In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS primarily comprisesConnection Request 20629CR and GPS Data 20629GD, and User Data 20629UDis retrieved from SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b of Host H, whichis sent to the police department in S4 described hereinbefore.

<<Audiovisual Playback Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audiovisual playback functionwhich enables Communication Device 200 to playback audiovisual data,such as movies, soap operas, situation comedies, news, and any type ofTV programs.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Audiovisual Playback Information Storage Area 20632 aof which the information stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction may be downloaded to Communication Device 200 from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the data and software programs stored inAudiovisual Playback Information Storage Area 20632 a. AudiovisualPlayback Information Storage Area 20632 a includes Audiovisual PlaybackData Storage Area 20632 b and Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area20632 c. Audiovisual Playback Data Storage Area 20632 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter. Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audiovisual Playback DataStorage Area 20632 b. Audiovisual Playback Data Storage Area 20632 bincludes Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 and Message DataStorage Area 20632 b 2. Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 stores aplurality of audiovisual data described hereinafter. Message DataStorage Area 20632 b 2 stores a plurality of message data describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the audiovisual data stored in AudiovisualData Storage Area 20632 b 1. Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1stores a plurality of audiovisual data wherein the audiovisual datastored therein in the present example are: Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 a,Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 b, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 c, andAudiovisual Data 20632 b 1 d, all of which are primarily composed ofvideo data and audio data. Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 a is a movie,Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 b is a soap opera, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1c is a situation comedy, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 d is TV news in thepresent embodiment. As another embodiment, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 dmay be an audiovisual data taken via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) andMicrophone 215 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Message Data Storage Area20632 b 2. Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 includes Start MessageText Data 20632 b 2 a, Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b, Pause MessageText Data 20632 b 2 c, Resume Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1, SlowReplay Message Text Data 20632 b 2 d, Forward Message Text Data 20632 b2 e, Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f, Next Message Text Data 20632b 2 g, and Previous Message Text Data 20632 b 2 h. Start Message TextData 20632 b 2 a is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)and which indicates that the playback of an audiovisual data isinitiated. Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process of anaudiovisual data is stopped. Pause Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c is atext data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that theplayback process of an audiovisual data is paused. Resume Message TextData 20632 b 2 c 1 is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 andwhich indicates that the playback process of an audiovisual data isresumed from the point it is paused. Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632b 2 d is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicatesthat the playback process of an audiovisual data is implemented in aslow motion. Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20632 b 2 e is a text datawhich is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audiovisualdata is fast-forwarded. Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f is atext data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that anaudiovisual data is fast-rewinded. Next Message Text Data 20632 b 2 g isa text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that theplayback process of the next audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1 is initiated. Previous Message Text Data 20632 b2 h is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicatesthat the playback process of the previous audiovisual data stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 is initiated.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in AudiovisualPlayback Software Storage Area 20632 c. Audiovisual Playback SoftwareStorage Area 20632 c includes Audiovisual Start Software 20632 c 1,Audiovisual Stop Software 20632 c 2, Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c3, Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 a, Audiovisual Slow ReplaySoftware 20632 c 4, Audiovisual Fast-Forward Software 20632 c 5,Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software 20632 c 6, Audiovisual Next Software20632 c 7, and Audiovisual Previous Software 20632 c 8. AudiovisualStart Software 20632 c 1 is a software program which initiates theplayback process of an audiovisual data. Audiovisual Stop Software 20632c 2 is a software program which stops the playback process of anaudiovisual data. Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3 is a softwareprogram which pauses the playback process of an audiovisual data.Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 a is a software program whichresumes the playback process of the audiovisual data from the point itis paused by Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3. Audiovisual SlowReplay Software 20632 c 4 is a software program which implements theplayback process of an audiovisual data in a slow motion. AudiovisualFast-Forward Software 20632 c 5 is a software program whichfast-forwards an audiovisual data. Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software20632 c 6 is a software program which fast-rewinds an audiovisual data.Audiovisual Next Software 20632 c 7 is a software program whichinitiates the playback process of the next audiovisual data stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1. Audiovisual Previous Software20632 c 8 is a software program which initiates the playback process ofthe previous audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates the messages displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).Eight types of messages are displayed on LCD 201, i.e., ‘Start’, ‘Stop’,‘Pause’, ‘Resume’, ‘Slow Reply’, ‘Fast-Forward’, ‘Fast-Rewind’, ‘Next’,and ‘Previous’. ‘Start’ is Start Message Text Data 20632 b 2 a, ‘Stop’is Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b, ‘Pause’ is Pause Message TextData 20632 b 2 c, ‘Resume’ is Resume Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1,‘Slow Reply’ is Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632 b2d, ‘Fast-Forward’is Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20632 b 2 e, ‘Fast-Rewind’ isFast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f, ‘Next’ is Next Message TextData 20632 b 2 g, ‘Previous’ is Previous Message Text Data 20632 b 2 hdescribed hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Selecting Software 20632 c 9stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c inpreparation of executing the software programs described hereinafter.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the identifications of the audiovisual datastored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays a list of the identifications on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). Aparticular audiovisual data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3).

The following paragraphs illustrate the software programs stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c. Nine types of inputsignals can be input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, i.e., the audiovisual playback signal, theaudiovisual stop signal, the audiovisual pause signal, the audiovisualresume signal, the audiovisual slow replay signal, the audiovisualfast-forward signal, the audiovisual fast-rewind signal, the audiovisualnext signal, and the audiovisual previous signal. The audiovisualplayback signal indicates to initiate the playback process of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisualstop signal indicates to stop the playback process of the audiovisualdata selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual pause signalindicates to pause the playback process of the audiovisual data selectedin S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual resume signal indicates toresume the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore from the point the audio data is paused. Theaudiovisual slow replay signal indicates to implement the playbackprocess of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore ina slow motion. The audiovisual fast-forward signal indicates tofast-forward the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore.The audiovisual fast-rewind signal indicates to fast-rewind theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisualnext signal indicates to initiate the playback process of the nextaudiovisual data of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore both of which are stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1. The audiovisual previous signal indicates to initiate theplayback process of the previous audiovisual data of the audiovisualdata selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which are stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Start Software 20632 c 1 storedin Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which initiatesthe playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual playback signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process (i.e., outputs the audiodata from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) and display the video data on LCD 201(FIG. 1)) of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore(S2), and retrieves Start Message Text Data 20632 b 2 a from MessageData Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Stop Software 20632 c 2 stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which stops theplayback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual stop signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then stops the playback process of the audiovisual dataselected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Stop MessageText Data 20632 b 2 b from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3 storedin Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which pauses theplayback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual pause signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then pauses the playback process of the audiovisual dataselected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Pause MessageText Data 20632 b 2 c from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3) When the playback process is paused in S2, the audio data includedin the audiovisual data is refrained from being output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) and a still image composing the video data included in theaudiovisual data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 astored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichresumes the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore from the point the audiovisual data is paused inS2 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual resume signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then resumes the playback process of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2) from thepoint it is paused in S2 described hereinbefore, and retrieves ResumeMessage Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1 from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3) When the playback process is resumed in S2, the audio data includedin the audiovisual data is resumed to be output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) and the video data included in the audiovisual data is resumedto be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Slow Replay Software 20632 c 4stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichimplements the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore in a slow motion. The audiovisual slow replaysignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playbackprocess of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore ina slow motion (S2), and retrieves Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632 b2 d from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Fast-Forward Software 20632 c 5stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichfast-forwards the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual fast-forward signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then fast-forwards the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Fast-Forward Message TextData 20632 b 2 e from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displaysthe data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software 20632 c 6stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichfast-rewinds the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore.The audiovisual fast-rewind signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-rewinds the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore(S2), and retrieves Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f fromMessage Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Next Software 20632 c 7 stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which initiates theplayback process of the next audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1. The audiovisual next signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of the nextaudiovisual data of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore both of which are stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1 (S2), and retrieves Next Message Text Data 20632 b 2 g fromMessage Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Previous Software 20632 c 8 is asoftware program which initiates the playback process of the previousaudiovisual data stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1. Theaudiovisual previous signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) theninitiates the playback process of the previous audiovisual data of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 (S2), and retrievesPrevious Message Text Data 20632 b 2 h from Message Data Storage Area20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specifiedperiod of time (S3).

As another embodiment, the audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1 may be stored in Host H and retrieved therefromwhen the software programs described hereinbefore are executed. In thisembodiment, the audio data is temporarily stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) andis erased from the portion which is playbacked.

<<Audio Playback Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audio playback function whichenables Communication Device 200 to playback audio data, such as jazzmusic, rock music, classic music, pops music, and any other types ofaudio data.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Audio Playback Information StorageArea 20633 a of which the information stored therein are describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction may be downloaded to Communication Device 200 from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the data and software programs stored inAudio Playback Information Storage Area 20633 a. In this embodiment,Audio Playback Information Storage Area 20633 a includes Audio PlaybackData Storage Area 20633 b and Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633c. Audio Playback Data Storage Area 20633 b stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audio Playback DataStorage Area 20633 b. In this embodiment, Audio Playback Data StorageArea 20633 b includes Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 and Message DataStorage Area 20633 b 2. Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 stores aplurality of audio data described hereinafter. Message Data Storage Area20633 b 2 stores a plurality of message data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the audio data stored in Audio Data StorageArea 20633 b 1. In this embodiment, Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1stores a plurality of audio data wherein the audio data stored thereinin the present example are: Audio Data 20633 b 1 a, Audio Data 20633 b 1b, Audio Data 20633 b 1 c, and Audio Data 20633 b 1 d, all of which areprimarily composed of video data and audio data. Audio Data 20633 b 1 ais a jazz music, Audio Data 20633 b 1 b is a rock music, Audio Data20633 b 1 c is a classic music, Audio Data 20633 b 1 d is a pops musicin the present embodiment. As another embodiment, Audio Data 20633 b 1 dmay be an audio data taken via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) and Microphone 215(FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Message Data Storage Area20633 b 2. In this embodiment, Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2includes Start Message Text Data 20633 b 2 a, Stop Message Text Data20633 b 2 b, Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 c, Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1, Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 d, ForwardMessage Text Data 20633 b 2 e, Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f,Next Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g, and Previous Message Text Data 20633b 2 h. Start Message Text Data 20633 b 2 a is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and which indicates that the playback ofan audio data is initiated. Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b is a textdata which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playbackprocess of an audio data is stopped. Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 cis a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates thatthe playback process of an audio data is paused. Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1 is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 andwhich indicates that the playback process of an audio data is resumedfrom the point it is paused. Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 dis a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates thatthe playback process of an audio data is implemented in a slow motion.Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audio data isfast-forwarded. Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f is a text datawhich is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audio data isfast-rewinded. Next Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g is a text data whichis displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process ofthe next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 isinitiated. Previous Message Text Data 20633 b 2 h is a text data whichis displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process ofthe previous audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 isinitiated.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c. In this embodiment, AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c includes Audio Start Software20633 c 1, Audio Stop Software 20633 c 2, Audio Pause Software 20633 c3, Audio Resume Software 20633 c 3 a, Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c4, Audio Fast-Forward Software 20633 c 5, Audio Fast-Rewind Software20633 c 6, Audio Next Software 20633 c 7, and Audio Previous Software20633 c 8. Audio Start Software 20633 c 1 is a software program whichinitiates the playback process of an audio data. Audio Stop Software20633 c 2 is a software program which stops the playback process of anaudio data. Audio Pause Software 20633 c 3 is a software program whichpauses the playback process of an audio data. Audio Resume Software20633 c 3 a is a software program which resumes the playback process ofthe audio data from the point it is paused by Audio Pause Software 20633c 3. Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c 4 is a software program whichimplements the playback process of an audio data in a slow motion. AudioFast-Forward Software 20633 c 5 is a software program whichfast-forwards an audio data. Audio Fast-Rewind Software 20633 c 6 is asoftware program which fast-rewinds an audio data. Audio Next Software20633 c 7 is a software program which initiates the playback process ofthe next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1. AudioPrevious Software 20633 c 8 is a software program which initiates theplayback process of the previous audio data stored in Audio Data StorageArea 20633 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates the messages displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, eight types of messages are displayed on LCD 201,i.e., ‘Start’, ‘Stop’, ‘Pause’, ‘Resume’, ‘Slow Reply’, ‘Fast-Forward’,‘Fast-Rewind’, ‘Next’, and ‘Previous’. ‘Start’ is Start Message TextData 20633 b 2 a, ‘Stop’ is Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b, ‘Pause’is Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 c, ‘Resume’ is Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1, ‘Slow Reply’ is Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633b 2 d, ‘Fast-Forward’ is Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e,‘Fast-Rewind’ is Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f, ‘Next’ isNext Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g, ‘Previous’ is Previous Message TextData 20633 b 2 h described hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates Audio Selecting Software 20633 c 9 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c in preparation of executingthe software programs described hereinafter. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves the identifications of the audio data stored in AudioData Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of theidentifications on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). A particular audio data isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3).

This paragraph and the following paragraphs illustrate the softwareprograms stored in Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c. Asdescribed in each drawing figure hereinafter, eight types of inputsignals can be input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, i.e., the audio playback signal, the audio stopsignal, the audio pause signal, the audio resume signal, the audio slowreplay signal, the audio fast-forward signal, the audio fast-rewindsignal, the audio next signal, and the audio previous signal. The audioplayback signal indicates to initiate the playback process of the audiodata selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audio stop signalindicates to stop the playback process of the audio data selected in S3described hereinbefore. The audio pause signal indicates to pause theplayback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audio resume signal indicates to resume the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore from thepoint the audio data is paused. The audio slow replay signal indicatesto implement the playback process of the audio data selected in S3described hereinbefore in a slow motion. The audio fast-forward signalindicates to fast-forward the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audio fast-rewind signal indicates to fast-rewind theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audio next signalindicates to initiate the playback process of the next audio data of theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1. The audio previous signalindicates to initiate the playback process of the previous audio data ofthe audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates Audio Start Software 20633 c 1 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which initiates theplayback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, the audio playback signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process (i.e.,outputs the audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1)) of the audio dataselected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Start MessageText Data 20633 b 2 a from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Stop Software 20633 c 2 stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c which stops the playback processof the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, the audio stop signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenstops the playback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b fromMessage Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Pause Software 20633 c 3 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which pauses the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, the audio pause signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenpauses the playback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 cfrom Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3) When the playbackprocess is paused in S2, the audio data included in the audio data isrefrained from being output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Resume Software 20633 c 3 a stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which resumes the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore from thepoint the audiovisual data is paused in S2 described hereinbefore. Inthis embodiment, the audio resume signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then resumes the playback process of the audio data selected inS3 described hereinbefore from the point the audiovisual data is pausedin S2 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1 from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displaysthe data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c 4 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which implements theplayback process of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbeforein a slow motion. In this embodiment, the audio slow replay signal isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore in a slow motion (S2),and retrieves Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 d from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Fast-Forward Software 20633 c 5 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which fast-forwards theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In this embodiment,the audio fast-forward signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-forwards the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2),and retrieves Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Fast-Rewind Software 20633 c 6 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which fast-rewinds theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In this embodiment,the audio fast-rewind signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-rewinds the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2),and retrieves Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Next Software 20633 c 7 stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c which initiates the playbackprocess of the next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b1. In this embodiment, the audio next signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of the next audio data ofthe audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S2), and retrieves NextMessage Text Data 20633 b 2 g from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Previous Software 20633 c 8 is asoftware program which initiates the playback process of the previousaudio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1. In thisembodiment, the audio previous signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) theninitiates the playback process of the previous audio data of the audiodata selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which are stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S2), and retrieves Previous MessageText Data 20633 b 2 h from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

As another embodiment, the audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area20633 b 1 may be stored in Host H and retrieved therefrom when thesoftware programs described hereinbefore are executed. In thisembodiment, the audio data is temporarily stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) andis erased from the portion which is playbacked.

<<Digital Camera Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the digital camera function whichenables Communication Device 200 to take digital photos by utilizing CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

The data and software programs stored in Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646 a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646 a. In this embodiment, Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646 a includes Digital Camera Data StorageArea 20646 b and Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c. DigitalCamera Data Storage Area 20646 b stores the data necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter. DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraData Storage Area 20646 b. In this embodiment, Digital Camera DataStorage Area 20646 b includes Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 andDigital Camera Function Data Storage Area 20646 b 2. Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 stores the data stored hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20646 b 1. In this embodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Photo ID’ and ‘Photo Data’. Column ‘PhotoID’ stores the identifications of the photo data, and column ‘PhotoData’ stores a plurality of photo data taken by implementing the presentfunction. In the example described in the present drawing, Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 stores the following data: ‘Photo ID’ Photo #1 ofwhich the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD1; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #2 of which the ‘PhotoData’ is 46PD2; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #3 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD3;‘Photo ID’ Photo #4 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD4; and ‘Photo ID’Photo #5 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD5.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2. In this embodiment, Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 includes Quality Data Storage Area20646 b 2 a, Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2b, and Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c. Quality Data Storage Area20646 b 2 a stores the data selected in S2 described hereinafter.Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b stores thedata selected in S2 described hereinafter. Strobe Data Storage Area20646 b 2 c stores the data selected in S2 described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c. In this embodiment, Digital CameraSoftware Storage Area 20646 c stores Quality Selecting Software 20646 c1, Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2, Trimming Software 20646 c3, Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4, Strobe Software 20646 c 5,Digital Camera Function Selecting Software 20646 c 6, Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7, Strobe On/Off SelectingSoftware 20646 c 8, Photo Data Shooting Software 20646 c 9, and MultiplePhoto Shooting Software 20646 c 10. Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1is the software program described hereinafter. Multiple Photo ShootingSoftware 20646 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter.Trimming Software 20646 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Strobe Software 20646 c 5 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Digital Camera Function Selecting Software 20646c 6 is the software program described hereinafter. Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Photo Data Shooting Software20646 c 9 is the software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Camera Function Selecting Software20646 c 6 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c whichadministers the overall flow of displaying the functions and selectingthe option for each function. In this embodiment, a list of functions isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The items displayed on LCD 201 are‘Quality’, ‘Multiple Photo’, and ‘Strobe’. A function is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2), and the relevant software program is activated thereafter (S3). Inthe present embodiment, Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 describedhereinafter is activated when ‘Quality’ displayed on LCD 201 is selectedin S2. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7described hereinafter is activated when ‘Multiple Photo’ is selected inS2. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8 described hereinafter isactivated when ‘Strobe’ is selected in S2.

This paragraph illustrates Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 storedin Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which selects thequality of the photo data taken by implementing the present function. Inthis embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are ‘High’, ‘STD’, and ‘Low’ inthe present embodiment. One of the options is selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). Theresolution of the photo data taken is high if ‘High’ is selected; theresolution of the photo taken is standard if ‘STD’ is selected; and theresolution of the photo taken is low if ‘Low’ is selected. The selectedoption is stored as the quality data in Quality Data Storage Area 20646b 2 a (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Number SelectingSoftware 20646 c 7 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which selects the number of photos taken by a single photo shootingsignal. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are figures from ‘1’through ‘10’. Only one photo is taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘1’is selected; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘2’ isselected; three photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘3’ isselected; four photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘4’ isselected; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘5’ isselected; six photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘6’ isselected; seven photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘7’ isselected; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘8’ isselected; nine photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘9’ isselected; and ten photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘10’ isselected. A digit from ‘1’ through ‘10’ is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The selecteddigital is stored as the multiple photo shooting number data in MultiplePhoto Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which selectsFlash Light Unit 220 (not shown) to be activated or not when a photo istaken. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are ‘On’ and ‘Off’.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated at the time photo is taken if ‘On’ isselected; and Flash Light Unit 220 is not activated at the time photo istaken if ‘Off’ is selected. One of the two options is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). The selected option is stored as the strobe data in Strobe DataStorage Area 20646 b 2 c (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Photo Data Shooting Software 20646 c 9 storedin Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takes photo(s) inaccordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, aphoto shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Here, the photo shooting signalindicates CPU 211 (FIG. 1) to input photo data to CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1)and store the data in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1. CPU 211 thenretrieves the quality data from Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 a(S2). The photo data is input via CCD Unit 214 (S3), and the data isstored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 with new photo ID inaccordance with the quality data retrieved in S2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takesphoto(s) in accordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, a photo shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the multiple photo shooting number data from Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b (S2). CPU 211 then takesphotos in accordance with the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 (S3). Namely, only one photo is taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘1’; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘2’; three photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘3’; four photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘4’; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘5’; six photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘6’; seven photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘7’; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘8’; nine photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘9’; and ten photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘10’.

This paragraph illustrates Strobe Software 20646 c 5 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takes photo(s) in accordancewith the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a photoshooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the strobedata from Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c (S2). If the strobe datais ‘On’ (S3), CPU 211 activates Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown) eachtime a photo is taken (S4). In other words, Strobe Software 20646 c 5 isharmonized with Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2 describedhereinbefore. Namely, Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for one time ifone photo is taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit220 is activated for two times if two photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for three times ifthree photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for four times if four photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for fivetimes if five photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. FlashLight Unit 220 is activated for six times if six photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated forseven times if seven photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for eight times if eight photos aretaken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated for nine times if nine photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for ten times if tenphotos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the zooming function whichzooms the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1. Inthis embodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Assuming that the userintends to zoom Object 20646Obj, the object displayed on LCD 201, to alarger size. The user selects Area 46ARa which includes Object 20646Objby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,and the selected area is zoomed to fit the size of LCD 201. The zoomedphoto is replaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the zooming function described hereinbefore. A certainphoto data selected by the user of Communication Device 200 is stored inArea 20646ARa of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data is as same asthat of Area 20646ARa. In this embodiment, Display Area 20646DA is thearea which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Area 46ARa is the areawhich is selected by the user of Communication Device 200. Object20646Obj is the object included in the photo data. Area 46ARa whichincludes Object 20646Obj is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data stored inArea 20646ARa is zoomed to the size in which the size of Area 46ARaequals to that of Display Area 20646DA. The zoomed photo data isreplaced with the original photo data and stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1. The portion of the photo data which does not fit Area20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4 stored inDigital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which implements theoperation described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays a list of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). Acertain photo data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S2), and the selected photo data isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Area 46ARadescribed hereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system (S4). When a zooming signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211(FIG. 1) implements the process described hereinbefore and replaces theoriginal photo data with the zoomed photo data, which is stored in PhotoData Storage Area 20646 b 1 (S6).

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the trimming function whichtrims the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 andthereby moves the selected object to the center of the photo data. Inthis embodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Point 20646PTa adjacent toObject 20646Obj is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system, and the photo is centered at Point20646PTa. The trimmed photo is replaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the trimming function described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, Display Area 20646DA is the portion of the photo data whichis displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Object 20646Obj is the object includedin the photo data. Point 20646PTa is the point selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200 adjacent to Object 20646Obj which is centeredby the present function. In this embodiment, a certain photo dataselected by the user of Communication Device 200 is stored in Area20646ARb of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data is as same as thatof Area 20646ARb. Point 20646PTa is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data iscentered at Point 20646PTa by sliding the entire photo data to theright. The trimmed photo data is replaced with the original photo dataand stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1. The portion of thephoto data which does not fit Area 20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Trimming Software 20646 c 3 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c which implements the operationdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays alist of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certain photodata is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Point 20646PTa describedhereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S4). When a trimming signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)centers the photo data at Point 20646PTa and replaces the original photodata with the trimmed photo data, which is stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1 (S6).

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple language displayingfunction wherein a language is selected from a plurality of languages,such as English, Japanese, French, and German, which is utilized tooperate Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654 a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 a. In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 aincludes Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b andMultiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c. MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b stores the data necessaryto implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter. Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b. In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 bincludes Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1, Language Type DataStorage Area 20654 b 2, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3, andSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4. Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter.Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 storesthe language table ID selected in S4 s described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1. In the present embodiment, Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1 includes Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1a, Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b, Language Table #3 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c, and Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d.Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a stores the data describedhereinafter. Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c storesthe data described hereinafter. Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a. In the present embodiment, Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data.

Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, and eachlanguage text data represents the English text data displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, Language Table #1 Storage Area20654 b 1 a stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Open file’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #2’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Close file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #3’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Delete’; the language item ID‘Language Item #4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Copy’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #5’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #6’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #7’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Insert’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #8’ and the corresponding language text data‘File’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #10’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘View’; the language item ID‘Language Item #11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Format’;the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #13’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Window’; the language item ID‘Language Item #14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Help’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #15’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #17’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #18’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #19’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #20’ and the corresponding language text data ‘No’; and thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #21’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Cancel’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b. In the present embodiment, Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Japanesetext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b stores the following data:the language item ID ‘Language Item #1’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Open file’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item #2’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Close file’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #3’ andthe corresponding language text data meaning ‘Delete’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #4’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Copy’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #5’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #6’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Paste’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Insert’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘File’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item #9’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Edit’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #10’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘View’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #11’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Tools’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Window’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item #14’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘My Network’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #16’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Local Disk’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #18’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Save’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item #19’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item #20’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘No’ in Japanese; and thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #21’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c. In the present embodiment, Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Frenchtext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c stores the following data:the language item ID ‘Language Item #1’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French #1’ meaning ‘Open file’ in French; the language itemID ‘Language Item #2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French #3’ meaning‘Delete’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item #4’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French #4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item #5’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French #5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item #6’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French #6’meaning ‘Paste’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item #7’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French #7’ meaning ‘Insert’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French #8’ meaning ‘File’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #9’ and the corresponding language text data‘French #9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #10’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French #10’ meaning‘View’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item #11’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French #11’ meaning ‘Format’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French #12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #13’ and the corresponding language text data‘French #13’ meaning ‘Window’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French #14’ meaning‘Help’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French #15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French #16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #17’ and the corresponding language text data‘French #17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item #18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item #19’and the corresponding language text data ‘French #19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item #20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French #20’ meaning ‘No’ in French; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #21’ and the corresponding language text data‘French #21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in French.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 d. In the present embodiment, Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 d comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Germantext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d stores the following data:the language item ID ‘Language Item #1’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German #1’ meaning ‘Open file’ in German; the language itemID ‘Language Item #2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German #3’ meaning‘Delete’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item #4’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German #4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item #5’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German #5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item #6’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German #6’meaning ‘Paste’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item #7’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German #7’ meaning ‘Insert’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German #8’ meaning ‘File’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #9’ and the corresponding language text data‘German #9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #10’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German #10’ meaning‘View’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item #11’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German #11’ meaning ‘Format’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German #12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #13’ and the corresponding language text data‘German #13’ meaning ‘Window’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German #14’ meaning‘Help’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German #15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German #16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #17’ and the corresponding language text data‘German #17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item #18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item #19’and the corresponding language text data ‘German #19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item #20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German #20’ meaning ‘No’ in German; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #21’ and the corresponding language text data‘German #21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in German.

This paragraph illustrates data stored in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2. In the present embodiment, Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Table ID’ and‘Language Type Data’. Column ‘Language Table ID’ stores the languagetable ID, and each language table ID represents the identification ofthe storage areas included in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1.Column ‘Language Type Data’ stores the language type data, and eachlanguage type data represents the type of the language utilized in thelanguage table of the corresponding language table ID. In the presentembodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 stores thefollowing data: the language table ID ‘Language Table #1’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘English’; the language table ID‘Language Table #2’ and the corresponding language type data ‘Japanese’;the language table ID ‘Language Table #3’ and the corresponding languagetype data ‘French’; and the language table ID ‘Language Table #4’ andthe corresponding language type data ‘German’. Here, the language tableID ‘Language Table #1’ is an identification of Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a; the language table ID ‘Language Table #2’ is anidentification of Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b; thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table #3’ is an identification of LanguageTable #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c; and the language table ID ‘LanguageTable #4’ is an identification of Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b1 d.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Item Data StorageArea 20654 b 3. In the present embodiment, Language Item Data StorageArea 20654 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Item Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language item data. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores thelanguage item data, and each language item data represents the contentand/or the meaning of the language text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3stores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item #1’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Open file’; the language item ID‘Language Item #2’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Closefile’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #3’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Delete’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #4’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Copy’; the language item ID‘Language Item #5’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Cut’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #6’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #7’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Insert’; the language item ID‘Language Item #8’ and the corresponding language item data ‘File’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #9’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #10’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘View’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #11’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Format’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #12’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #13’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Window’; the language item ID‘Language Item #14’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Help’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #15’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #17’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Local Disk’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #18’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item #19’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #20’ and the corresponding language item data ‘No’; and thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #21’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Cancel’. Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language Item Data’are same as the ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ of LanguageTable #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c. In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cstores Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1, Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2, Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 a, Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 b, and Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4. Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1is the software program described hereinafter. Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2 is the software program describedhereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor20654 c 3 a is the software program described hereinafter. Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Explorer 20654 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing English>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘English’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table #1) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., English). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table #1) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b1 a) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ inLanguage Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘File’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item #9’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Edit’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #10’ in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language text data‘View’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #11’ in Language Table #1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Format’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ in LanguageTable #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Tools’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Window’ at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item #14’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Help’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #18’ in Language Table #1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Save’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S2).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #19’ in LanguageTable #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Yes’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘No’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item #21’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). The save signalindicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 describedhereinbefore is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the steps ofS2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #15’ in Language Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1a and displays the corresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ inLanguage Table #1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Trash’ at the predetermined locationin the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #17’ in Language Table #1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language text data‘Local Disk’ at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing Japanese>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘Japanese’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table #2) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., Japanese). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table #2) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b1 b) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ inLanguage Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘File’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #9’ in Language Table #2 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Edit’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘View’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #11’ in Language Table #2 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Format’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #12’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Tools’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #13’ in Language Table #2 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Window’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #14’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Help’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #18’ in Language Table #2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Save’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem #19’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Yes’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #20’ in Language Table #2 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘No’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Cancel’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). The save signalindicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 describedhereinbefore is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ in Language Table #2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘My Network’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ in Language Table #2 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Trash’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theWindows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifies thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item #17’ in Language Table #2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text data indicating‘Local Disk’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing French>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘French’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table #3) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., French). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table #3) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b1 c) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ inLanguage Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘French #8’ indicating ‘File’ in Frenchat the predetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #9’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #9’ indicating ‘Edit’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #10’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1c and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French #10’indicating ‘View’ in French at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘French #11’ indicating ‘Format’ inFrench at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #12’ indicating ‘Tools’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #13’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1c and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French #13’indicating ‘Window’ in French at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘French #14’ indicating ‘Help’ inFrench at the predetermined location in the word processor (S8).Alphanumeric data is input to the word processor by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #18’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #18’ indicating ‘Save’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #19’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1c and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French #19’indicating ‘Yes’ in French at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table #3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘French #20’ indicating ‘No’ in Frenchat the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #21’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to savethe alphanumeric data input in S9 described hereinbefore is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #15’ indicating ‘My Network’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #16’ indicating ‘Trash’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #17’ in Language Table #3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French #17’ indicating ‘Local Disk’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing German>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘German’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table #4) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., German). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table #4) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b1 d) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #8’ inLanguage Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘German #8’ indicating ‘File’ in Germanat the predetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #9’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #9’ indicating ‘Edit’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #10’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German #10’indicating ‘View’ in German at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘German #11’ indicating ‘Format’ inGerman at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #12’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #12’ indicating ‘Tools’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #13’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German #13’indicating ‘Window’ in German at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘German #14’ indicating ‘Help’ inGerman at the predetermined location in the word processor (S8).Alphanumeric data is input to the word processor by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #18’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #18’ indicating ‘Save’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item #19’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German #19’indicating ‘Yes’ in German at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table #4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘German #20’ indicating ‘No’ in Germanat the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #21’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to savethe alphanumeric data input in S9 described hereinbefore is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #15’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #15’ indicating ‘My Network’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #16’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #16’ indicating ‘Trash’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item #17’ in Language Table #4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German #17’ indicating ‘Local Disk’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing Other Languages>>

For the avoidance of doubt, the present function is not limited toselect a language, to operate Communication Device 200, only from theforegoing four languages of English, Japanese, French, and German. Thepresent function is also capable to select a language from Dutch,Chinese, Arabic, Korean, Spanish, Italian, and any other languagesexisting in this world, in addition to the foregoing four languages.

<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the Caller's Information displayingfunction which displays the Information regarding the caller (e.g.,name, phone number, email address, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

The first set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device, a CommunicationDevice 200, utilized by the caller.

The second set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data andsoftware programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device, aCommunication Device 200, utilized by the callee.

The third set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, RAM 206 of Caller'sDevice includes Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655 a. In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 a includes Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b and Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c.Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter. Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b. In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bincludes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4, Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5, Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7,Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8, and Work Area 20655 b 9.Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3 stores the data described hereinafter. Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the data described hereinafter.Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 stores the caller'scalculated GPS data which represents the current geographic location ofCaller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6 stores the callee's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Callee's Device in (x, y,z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7 stores the map datarepresenting the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecaller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9 is astorage area utilized to perform calculation and to temporarily storedata.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1. In the present embodiment,Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 includes Caller's AudioData Storage Area 20655 b 1 a and Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 1 b. Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 a stores thecaller's audio data which represents the audio data input via Microphone215 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b 1 b stores the caller's visual data which represents the visual datainput via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2. In the present embodiment,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 includes Callee's AudioData Storage Area 20655 b 2 a and Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 2 b. Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a stores thecallee's audio data which represents the audio data sent from Callee'sDevice. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 b stores thecallee's visual data which represents the visual data sent from Callee'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3. In the present embodiment, Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Caller'sPersonal Data’ and ‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’. Column‘Caller's Personal Data’ stores the caller's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the caller. Column ‘Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Flag’ stores the permitted caller's personal data flag andeach permitted caller's personal data flag represents whether thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device. The permitted caller's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding caller'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3stores the following data: the caller's name and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's phone number andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's email address and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘1’; the caller's home address and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's business address and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'stitle and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’;the caller's hobby and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’; the caller's blood type and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's gender and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sage and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; andcaller's date of birth and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4. In the present embodiment, Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the callee's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the callee which are displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Callee'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the callee's name and phonenumber.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c. In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores Permitted Caller's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1,Dialing Software 20655 c 2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c 3, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4, Caller's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655 c 5, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6, Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 a, Permitted Callee's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655 c 7, Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8,Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9, and Callee's VisualData Displaying Software 20655 c 10. Permitted Caller's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1 is the software program describedhereinafter. Dialing Software 20655 c 2 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3is the software program described hereinafter. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4 is the software program describedhereinafter. Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5 isthe software program described hereinafter. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 ais the software program described hereinafter. Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software20655 c 9 is the software program described hereinafter. Callee's VisualData Displaying Software 20655 c 10 is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206A(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, RAM 206A ofCallee's Device includes Callee's Information Displaying InformationStorage Area 20655 aA of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655 aA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 aA includes Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655 bA and Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA. Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA storesthe data necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCallee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter. Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Callee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bAincludes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A, Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A, Caller's Map Data StorageArea 20655 b 7A, Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A, and WorkArea 20655 b 9A. Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1Astores the data described hereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2A stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the data described hereinafter.Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A stores the data describedhereinafter. Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A storesthe caller's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Caller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 6A stores the callee's calculated GPS datawhich represents the current geographic location of Callee's Device in(x, y, z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A stores themap data representing the surrounding area of the location indicated bythe caller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b8A stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9A is astorage area utilized to perform calculation and to temporarily storedata.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A. In the present embodiment,Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A includes Caller'sAudio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA and Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 bA. Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA storesthe caller's audio data which represents the audio data sent fromCaller's Device in a wireless fashion. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 1 bA stores the caller's visual data which represents the visualdata input sent from Caller's Device in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A. In the present embodiment,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A includes Callee'sAudio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA and Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 bA. Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA storesthe callee's audio data which represents the audio data input viaMicrophone 215 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 bA stores the callee's visual data which represents thevisual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3A. In the present embodiment, Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the caller's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the caller which are displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Caller'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the caller's name, phonenumber, email address, and home address.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4A. In the present embodiment, Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4A comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Callee'sPersonal Data’ and ‘Permitted Callee's Personal Data Flag’. Column‘Callee's Personal Data’ stores the callee's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the callee. Column ‘Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Flag’ stores the permitted callee's personal data flag andeach permitted callee's personal data flag represents whether thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. The permitted callee's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding callee'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4Astores the following data: callee's name and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee's phone number and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee'semail address and the corresponding permitted caller's personal dataflag ‘0’; the callee's home address and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's business address and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'stitle and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’;the callee's hobby and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’; the callee's blood type and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'sage and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; andcallee's date of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA stores Permitted Callee's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655 c1A, Dialing Software 20655 c 2A, Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software20655 c 3A, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5A, Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aA, Permitted Caller's PersonalData Displaying Software 20655 c 7A, Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A,Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9A, and Caller's VisualData Displaying Software 20655 c 10A. Permitted Callee's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1A is the software program describedhereinafter. Dialing Software 20655 c 2A is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3Ais the software program described hereinafter. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5A isthe software program described hereinafter. Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A is the software program describedhereinafter. Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6aA is the software program described hereinafter. Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7A is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Caller's Audio Data OutputtingSoftware 20655 c 9A is the software program described hereinafter.Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655 c 10A is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host H. In thepresent embodiment, Host H includes Caller/Callee Information StorageArea H55 a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55 a. In the present embodiment, Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55 a includes Caller/Callee Data Storage AreaH55 b and Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c. Caller/Callee DataStorage Area H55 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeData Storage Area H55 b. In the present embodiment, Caller/Callee DataStorage Area H55 b includes Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1,Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2, Map Data Storage Area H55 b3, Work Area h55 b 4, Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5,and Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6. Caller'sInformation Storage Area H55 b 1 stores the Caller's Informationreceived Caller's Device. Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2stores the Callee's Information received Callee's Device. Map DataStorage Area H55 b 3 stores the map data received from Caller's Deviceand Callee's Device. Work Area H55 b 4 is a storage area utilized toperform calculation and to temporarily store data. Caller's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 stores the callee'scalculated GPS data.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55 c. In the present embodiment, Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55 c stores Dialing Software H55 c 2, Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3, Callee's Device Pin-pointingSoftware H55 c 3 a, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4,Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6, and Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 a. Dialing Software H55 c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3 a is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter. Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving SoftwareH55 c 6 a is the software program described hereinafter.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCaller's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Callee'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655 c 1 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which selects the permittedcaller's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves all of the caller's personal data from Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3 (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55 c 2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H, Dialing Software20655 c 2 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2A storedin Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA ofCallee's Device, which enables to connect between Caller's Device andCallee's Device via Host H in a wireless fashion. In the presentembodiment, a connection is established between Caller's Device and HostH (S1). Next, a connection is established between Host H and Callee'sDevice (S2). As a result, Caller's Device and Callee's Device are ableto exchange audiovisual data, text data, and various types of data witheach other. The connection is maintained until Caller's Device, Host H,or Callee's Device terminates the connection.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H andCaller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device,which identifies the current geographic location of Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects theGPS raw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPSdata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host Hproduces the caller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPSdata (S4). Host H stores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5 (S5). Host H then retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea H55 b 5 (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7). Uponreceiving the caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211stores the data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5(S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized to producethe caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller's calculated GPS datais the data representing the location of Caller's Device in (x, y, z)format. The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the rawGPS data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecaller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5 (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which sendsand receives the map data. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device retrieves the caller's calculated GPS data fromCaller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 (S1), and sends thedata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the calculated GPS data fromCaller's Device (S3), Host H identifies the map data in Map Data StorageArea H55 b 3 (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area ofthe location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host Hretrieves the map data from Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (S5), andsends the data to Caller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map data fromHost H (S7), Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 7 (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655 c 5 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, which collects the audiovisual data ofthe caller to be sent to Callee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the caller'saudiovisual data from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 thenstores the caller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b 1 a (S2), and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 b (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device and Host H. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrievesthe permitted caller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3 (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's calculated GPS datafrom Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7(S3). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 a (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's visualdata from Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 b (S5). CPU 211then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined asthe ‘Caller's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receivingthe Caller's Information from Caller's Device (S7), Host H stores theCaller's Information in Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aAstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Informationbetween Host H and Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, Host Hretrieves the Caller's Information from Caller's Information StorageArea H55 b 1 (S1), and sends the Caller's Information to Callee's Device(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device receives the Caller'sInformation from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted caller'spersonal data in Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A (S4).CPU 211 stores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (S6). CPU 211 stores thecaller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA(S7). CPU 211 stores the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 bA (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 7A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which displays the permittedcaller's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves thepermitted caller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3A (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA ofCallee's Device, which displays the map representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrievesthe caller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5A (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data fromCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the caller's current location icon in accordance with the caller'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the caller's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Caller's Device in the map data.The map with the caller's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c 9A stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655 c of Caller's Device, which outputs the caller's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's audio data fromCaller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA (S1). CPU 211 then outputsthe caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software20655 c 10A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which displays the caller's visualdata on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's visual datafrom Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 bA (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays the caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCallee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Caller'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655 c 1A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which selects the permittedcallee's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves all of the callee's personal data from Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4A (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55 c 2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H, Dialing Software20655 c 2A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2 storedin Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c ofCaller's Device, which enables to connect between Callee's Device andCaller's Device via Host H in a wireless fashion. In the presentembodiment, a connection is established between Callee's Device and HostH (S1). Next, a connection is established between Host H and Caller'sDevice (S2). As a result, Callee's Device and Caller's Device are ableto exchange audiovisual data, text data, and various types of data witheach other. The sequence described in the present paragraph is notnecessarily implemented if the connection between Caller's Device andCallee's Device is established as described hereinbefore. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph may be implemented if the connectionis accidentally terminated by Callee's Device and the connection processis initiated by Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H andCallee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee'sDevice, which identifies the current geographic location of Callee'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Devicecollects the GPS raw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211sends the raw GPS data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data(S3), Host H produces the callee's calculated GPS data by referring tothe raw GPS data (S4). Host H stores the callee's calculated GPS data inCallee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 (S5). Host H thenretrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area H55 b 6 (S6), and sends the data to Callee's Device(S7). Upon receiving the callee's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8),CPU 211 stores the data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655 b 6A (S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilizedto produce the callee's calculated GPS data, and the callee's calculatedGPS data is the data representing the location of Callee's Device in (x,y, z) format. The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the rawGPS data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecallee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6A (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee'sDevice, which sends and receives the map data. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b 6A (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving thecalculated GPS data from Callee's Device (S3), Host H identifies the mapdata in Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (S4). Here, the map datarepresents the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecallee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrieves the map data from MapData Storage Area H55 b 3 (S5), and sends the data to Callee's Device(S6). Upon receiving the map data from Host H (S7), Callee's Devicestores the data in Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A (S8). Thesequence described in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655 c 5A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which collects the audiovisual data ofthe callee to be sent to Caller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'saudiovisual data from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 thenstores the callee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b 2 aA (S2), and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 bA (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 cof Host H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cAof Callee's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Callee's Device and Host H. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrievesthe permitted callee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 4A (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A(S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 aA (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's visualdata from Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 bA (S5). CPU 211then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined asthe ‘Callee's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receivingthe Callee's Information from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores theCallee's Information in Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 cof Host H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6a stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Informationbetween Host H and Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Host Hretrieves the Callee's Information from Callee's Information StorageArea H55 b 2 (S1), and sends the Callee's Information to Caller's Device(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device receives the Callee'sInformation from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted callee'spersonal data in Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 (S4). CPU211 stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 6 (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCallee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8 (S6). CPU 211 stores thecallee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a(S7). CPU 211 stores the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 b (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 7 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which displays the permittedcallee's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves thepermitted callee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 4 (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c ofCaller's Device, which displays the map representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrievesthe callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6 (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data fromCallee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8 (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the callee's current location icon in accordance with the callee'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the callee's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Callee's Device in the map data.The map with the callee's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c 9 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655 c of Caller's Device, which outputs the callee's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's audio data fromCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a (S1). CPU 211 then outputsthe caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software20655 c 10 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, which displays the callee's visual dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's visual data fromCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 b (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays the callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

<<Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Phone)>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the communication device remotecontrolling function (by phone) which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to remotely control Communication Device 200 via conventionaltelephone Phone PH.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Communication Device Controlling InformationStorage Area H57 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area H57 a. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area H57 a includesCommunication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H57 b andCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H57 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H57 c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Host H, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area H57 b. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H57 b includesPassword Data Storage Area H57 b 1, Phone Number Data Storage Area H57 b2, Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3, and Work Area H57 b 4. Password DataStorage Area H57 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. Phone NumberData Storage Area H57 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter. AudioData Storage Area H57 b 3 stores the data described hereinafter. WorkArea H57 b 4 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage AreaH57 b 1. In this embodiment, Password Data Storage Area H57 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘UserID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents the identificationof the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ storesthe password data, and each password data represents the password set bythe user of the corresponding user ID. Here, each password data iscomposed of alphanumeric data. In this embodiment, Password Data StorageArea H57 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User #1’ and thecorresponding password data ‘Password Data #1’; the user ID ‘User #2’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #2’; the user ID‘User #3’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #3’; theuser ID ‘User #4’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#4’; and the user ID ‘User #5’ and the corresponding password data‘Password Data #5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea H57 b 2. In this embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H57 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’. Column‘User ID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents theidentification of the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘PhoneNumber Data’ stores the phone number data, and each phone number datarepresents the phone number of the user of the corresponding user ID.Here, each phone number data is composed of numeric data. In thisembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H57 b 2 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User #1’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data #1’; the user ID ‘User #2’ and the correspondingphone number data ‘Phone Number Data #2’; the user ID ‘User #3’ and thecorresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data #3’; the user ID‘User #4’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#4’; and the user ID ‘User #5’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data #5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audio Data Storage AreaH57 b 3. In this embodiment, Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Audio ID’ and ‘Audio Data’. Column ‘Audio ID’ storesthe audio IDs, and each audio ID represents the identification of theaudio data stored in column ‘Audio Data’. Column ‘Audio Data’ stores theaudio data, and each audio data represents a message output from aconventional telephone Phone PH. In this embodiment, Audio Data StorageArea H57 b 3 stores the following data: the audio ID ‘Audio #0’ and thecorresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #0’; the audio ID ‘Audio #1’ andthe corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #1’; the audio ID ‘Audio #2’and the corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #2’; the audio ID ‘Audio#3’ and the corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #3’; the audio ID‘Audio #4’ and the corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #4’; the audioID ‘Audio #5’ and the corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #5’; and theaudio ID ‘Audio #6’ and the corresponding audio data ‘Audio Data #6’.‘Audio Data #0’ represents the message: ‘To deactivate manner mode,press 1. To deactivate manner mode and ring your mobile phone, press 2.To ring your mobile phone, press 3. To change password of your mobilephone, press 4. To lock your mobile phone, press 5. To power off yourmobile phone, press 6.’ ‘Audio Data #1’ represents the message: ‘Themanner mode has been deactivated.’ ‘Audio Data #2’ represents themessage: ‘The manner mode has been deactivated and your mobile phone hasbeen rung.’ ‘Audio Data #3’ represents the message: ‘Your mobile phonehas been rung.’ ‘Audio Data #4’ represents the message: ‘The password ofyour mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Audio Data #5’ represents themessage: ‘Your mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Audio Data #6’represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has been power-offed.’ Theforegoing audio data may be recorded in either male's voice or female'svoice.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c stores UserAuthenticating Software H57 c 1, Menu Introducing Software H57 c 2, LineConnecting Software H57 c 3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software H57 c 4,Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H57 c 5, Ringing SoftwareH57 c 6, Password Changing Software H57 c 7, Device Locking Software H57c 8, and Power Off Software H57 c 9. User Authenticating Software H57 c1 is the software program described hereinafter. Menu IntroducingSoftware H57 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter. LineConnecting Software H57 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software H57 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware H57 c 5 is the software program described hereinafter. RingingSoftware H57 c 6 is the software program described hereinafter. PasswordChanging Software H57 c 7 is the software program described hereinafter.Device Locking Software H57 c 8 is the software program describedhereinafter. Power Off Software H57 c 9 is the software programdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20657 a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area 20657 a. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area 20657 aincludes Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657 b andCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657 c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described hereinafter.Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Communication Device 200, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20657 a may be downloaded from HostH.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area 20657 b. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657 b includesPassword Data Storage Area 20657 b 1 and Work Area 20657 b 4. PasswordData Storage Area 20657 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. WorkArea 20657 b 4 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage Area20657 b 1. In this embodiment, Password Data Storage Area 20657 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘UserID’ stores the user ID which represents the identification of the userof Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores the passworddata set by the user of Communication Device 200. Here, the passworddata is composed of alphanumeric data. Assuming that the user ID ofCommunication Device 200 is ‘User #1’. In this embodiment, Password DataStorage Area H57 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User #1’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea 20657 b 2. In this embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area 20657b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID of the user of Communication Device200. Column ‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phone number data whichrepresents the phone number of Communication Device 200. Here, the phonenumber data is composed of numeric data. In this embodiment, PhoneNumber Data Storage Area H57 b 2 stores the following data: the user ID‘User #1’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area 20657 c. In this embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657 c storesLine Connecting Software 20657 c 3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software20657 c 4, Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657 c 5,Ringing Software 20657 c 6, Password Changing Software 20657 c 7, DeviceLocking Software 20657 c 8, and Power Off Software 20657 c 9. LineConnecting Software 20657 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20657 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware 20657 c 5 is the software program described hereinafter.Ringing Software 20657 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Password Changing Software 20657 c 7 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Device Locking Software 20657 c 8 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Power Off Software 20657 c 9 isthe software program described hereinafter.

The following paragraphs illustrate the software programs which enablesthe user of Communication Device 200 to remotely control CommunicationDevice 200 via conventional telephone Phone PH.

This paragraph illustrates User Authenticating Software H57 c 1 storedin Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of HostH, which authenticates the user of Communication Device 200 to implementthe present function via Phone PH. In this embodiment, Phone PH callsHost H by dialing the predetermined phone number of Host H (S1). Uponreceiving the call from Phone PH (S2) and the line is connectedtherebetween (S3), the user, by utilizing Phone PH, inputs both his/herpassword data (S4) and the phone number data of Communication Device 200(S5). Host H initiates the authentication process by referring toPassword Data Storage Area H57 b 1 and Phone Number Data Storage AreaH57 b 2) (S6). The authentication process is completed (and thesequences described hereafter are enabled thereafter) if the passworddata and the phone number data described in S4 and S5 match with thedata stored in Password Data Storage Area H57 b 1 and Phone Number DataStorage Area H57 b 2.

This paragraph illustrates Menu Introducing Software H57 c 2 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host H,which introduces the menu via Phone PH. In this embodiment, Host Hretrieves Audio Data #0 from Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 (S1), andsends the data to Phone PH (S2). Upon receiving Audio Data #0 from HostH (S3), Phone PH outputs Audio Data #0 from its speaker (S4). The userpresses one of the keys of ‘1’ through ‘6’ wherein the sequencesimplemented thereafter are described hereinafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Line Connecting Software H57 c 3 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host Hand Line Connecting Software 20657 c 3 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657 c of Communication Device 200,which connect line between Host H and Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, Host H calls Communication Device 200 by retrieving thecorresponding phone number data from Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b 2 (S1). Upon Communication Device 200 receiving the call from Host H(S2), the line is connected therebetween (S3). For the avoidance ofdoubt, the line is connected between Host H and Communication Device 200merely to implement the present function, and a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating Software H57 c 4stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 cof Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20657 c 4 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657 c ofCommunication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200. Here, Communication Device 200 activatesVibrator 217 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is in the mannermode and outputs a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) whenCommunication Device 200 is not in the manner mode, upon receiving anincoming call. Assume that the user presses key ‘1’ of Phone PH (S1). Inresponse, Phone PH sends the corresponding signal to Host H (S2). HostH, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner modedeactivating command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receivingthe manner mode deactivating command from Host H (S4), CommunicationDevice 200 deactivates the manner mode (S5). Host H retrieves Audio Data#1 from Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 and sends the data to Phone PH(S6). Upon receiving Audio Data #1 from Host H, Phone PH outputs thedata from its speaker (S7). Normally the purpose to output the ringingsound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification to the user thatCommunication Device 200 has received an incoming call, and a voicecommunication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call. Incontrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H57 c 5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657 c 5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing SoftwareH57 c 5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage AreaH57 c of Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657 c5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c of Communication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200 and outputs a ringing sound thereafter. Assumethat the user presses key ‘2’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PHsends the corresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receivingthe signal described in S2, sends a manner mode deactivating & deviceringing command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving themanner mode deactivating & device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 deactivates the manner mode (S5) and outputs aring data from Speaker 216 (S6). Host H retrieves Audio Data #2 fromAudio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 and sends the data to Phone PH (S7).Upon receiving Audio Data #2 from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data fromits speaker (S8). Normally the purpose to output the ringing sound fromSpeaker 216 is to give a notification to the user that CommunicationDevice 200 has received an incoming call, and a voice communication isenabled thereafter upon answering the call. In contrast, the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 by executing Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software H57 c 5 and Manner Mode Deactivating &Ringing Software 20657 c 5 is merely to let the user to identify thelocation of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates Ringing Software H57 c 6 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host Hand Ringing Software 20657 c 6 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657 c of Communication Device 200,which output a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Assume that theuser presses key ‘3’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends thecorresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signaldescribed in S2, sends a device ringing command to Communication Device200 (S3). Upon receiving the device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S5). HostH retrieves Audio Data #3 from Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 and sendsthe data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data #3 from Host H,Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7). Normally the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification tothe user that Communication Device 200 has received an incoming call,and a voice communication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call.In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Ringing Software H57 c 6 and Ringing Software 20657 c 6 ismerely to let the user to identify the location of Communication Device200. Therefore, a voice communication between human beings is notenabled thereafter by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates Password Changing Software H57 c 7 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host Hand Password Changing Software 20657 c 7 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657 c of Communication Device 200,which change the password necessary to operate Communication Device 200.Assume that the user presses key ‘4’ of Phone PH (S1). In response,Phone PH sends the corresponding signal to Host H (S2). The user thenenters a new password data by utilizing Phone PH (S3), which is sent toCommunication Device 200 by Host H (S4). Upon receiving the new passworddata from Host H (S5), Communication Device 200 stores the new passworddata in Password Data Storage Area 20657 b 1 and the old password datais erased (S6). Host H retrieves Audio Data #4 from Audio Data StorageArea H57 b 3 and sends the data to Phone PH (S7). Upon receiving AudioData #4 from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S8).

This paragraph illustrates Device Locking Software H57 c 8 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host Hand Device Locking Software 20657 c 8 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657 c of Communication Device 200,which lock Communication Device 200, i.e., nullify any input signalinput via Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). Assume that the user presses key‘5’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends the correspondingsignal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a device locking command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the device locking command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 is locked thereafter, i.e., any input via InputDevice 210 is nullified unless a password data matching to the onestored in Password Data Storage Area 20657 b 1 is entered (S5). Host Hretrieves Audio Data #5 from Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 and sendsthe data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data #5 from Host H,Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Power Off Software H57 c 9 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57 c of Host Hand Power Off Software 20657 c 9 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657 c of Communication Device 200,which turn off the power of Communication Device 200. Assume that theuser presses key ‘6’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends thecorresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signaldescribed in S2, sends a power off command to Communication Device 200(S3). Upon receiving the power off command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 turns off the power of itself (S5). Host Hretrieves Audio Data #6 from Audio Data Storage Area H57 b 3 and sendsthe data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data #6 from Host H,Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7).

<<Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (by Web)>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the communication device remotecontrolling function (by web) which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to remotely control Communication Device 200 by an ordinarypersonal computer (Personal Computer PC) via the Internet, i.e., byaccessing a certain web site. Here, Personal Computer PC may be any typeof personal computer, including a desktop computer, lap top computer,and PDA.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thepresent embodiment, Host H includes Communication Device ControllingInformation Storage Area H58 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area H58 a. In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Information Storage AreaH58 a includes Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 band Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H58 c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Host H, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b. In the present embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b includesPassword Data Storage Area H58 b 1, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b2, Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3, and Work Area H58 b 4.Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1 stores the data describedhereinafter. Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 stores thedata described hereinafter. Work Area H58 b 4 is utilized as a work areato perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage AreaH58 b 1. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘UserID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents the identificationof the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ storesthe password data, and each password data represents the password set bythe user of the corresponding user ID. Here, each password data iscomposed of alphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, Password DataStorage Area H58 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User #1’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #1’; the user ID‘User #2’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #2’; theuser ID ‘User #3’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#3’; the user ID ‘User #4’ and the corresponding password data ‘PasswordData #4’; and the user ID ‘User #5’ and the corresponding password data‘Password Data #5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea H58 b 2. In the present embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage AreaH58 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents theidentification of the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘PhoneNumber Data’ stores the phone number data, and each phone number datarepresents the phone number of the user of the corresponding user ID.Here, each phone number data is composed of numeric data. In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User #1’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data #1’; the user ID ‘User #2’ and the correspondingphone number data ‘Phone Number Data #2’; the user ID ‘User #3’ and thecorresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data #3’; the user ID‘User #4’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#4’; and the user ID ‘User #5’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data #5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Web Display Data StorageArea H58 b 3. In the present embodiment, Web Display Data Storage AreaH58 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Web Display ID’ and ‘Web DisplayData’. Column ‘Web Display ID’ stores the web display IDs, and each webdisplay ID represents the identification of the web display data storedin column ‘Web Display Data’. Column ‘Web Display Data’ stores the webdisplay data, and each web display data represents a message displayedon Personal Computer PC. In the present embodiment, Web Display DataStorage Area H58 b 3 stores the following data: the web display ID ‘WebDisplay #0’ and the corresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#0’; the web display ID ‘Web Display #1’ and the corresponding webdisplay data ‘Web Display Data #1’; the web display ID ‘Web Display #2’and the corresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data #2’; the webdisplay ID ‘Web Display #3’ and the corresponding web display data ‘WebDisplay Data #3’; the web display ID ‘Web Display #4’ and thecorresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data #4’; the web display ID‘Web Display #5’ and the corresponding web display data ‘Web DisplayData #5’; and the web display ID ‘Web Display #6’ and the correspondingweb display data ‘Web Display Data #6’. ‘Web Display Data #0’ representsthe message: ‘To deactivate manner mode, press 1. To deactivate mannermode and ring your mobile phone, press 2. To ring your mobile phone,press 3. To change password of your mobile phone, press 4. To lock yourmobile phone, press 5. To power off your mobile phone, press 6.’ ‘WebDisplay Data #1’ represents the message: ‘The manner mode has beendeactivated.’ ‘Web Display Data #2’ represents the message: ‘The mannermode has been deactivated and your mobile phone has been rung.’ ‘WebDisplay Data #3’ represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has beenrung.’ ‘Web Display Data #4’ represents the message: ‘The password ofyour mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Web Display Data #5’ representsthe message: ‘Your mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Web Display Data #6’represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has been power-offed.’ Thisparagraph illustrates the display of Personal Computer PC. In thepresent embodiment, Home Page 20158HP, i.e., a home page to implementthe present function is displayed on Personal Computer PC. Home Page20158HP is primarily composed of Web Display Data #0 and six buttons,i.e., Buttons 1 through 6. Following the instruction described in WebDisplay Data #0, the user may select one of the buttons to implement thedesired function as described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c. In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 cstores User Authenticating Software H58 c 1, Menu Introducing SoftwareH58 c 2, Line Connecting Software H58 c 3, Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware H58 c 4, Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5,Ringing Software H58 c 6, Password Changing Software H58 c 7, DeviceLocking Software H58 c 8, and Power Off Software H58 c 9. UserAuthenticating Software H58 c 1 is the software program describedhereinafter. Menu Introducing Software H58 c 2 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Line Connecting Software H58 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58 c 4is the software program described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating& Ringing Software H58 c 5 is the software program describedhereinafter. Ringing Software H58 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Password Changing Software H58 c 7 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Device Locking Software H58 c 8 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Power Off Software H58 c 9 is thesoftware program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206 includes Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20658 a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area 20658 a. In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20658 a includes Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area20658 b and Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c. Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described hereinafter.Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Communication Device 200, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20658 a may be downloaded from HostH.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 b. In the present embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 b includesPassword Data Storage Area 20658 b 1 and Work Area 20658 b 4. PasswordData Storage Area 20658 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. WorkArea 20658 b 4 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage Area20658 b 1. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area 20658 b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column‘User ID’ stores the user ID which represents the identification of theuser of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores thepassword data set by the user of Communication Device 200. Here, thepassword data is composed of alphanumeric data. Assuming that the userID of Communication Device 200 is ‘User #1’. In the present embodiment,Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1 stores the following data: the userID ‘User #1’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea 20658 b 2. In the present embodiment, Phone Number Data StorageArea 20658 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone NumberData’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID of the user of CommunicationDevice 200. Column ‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phone number datawhich represents the phone number of Communication Device 200. Here, thephone number data is composed of numeric data. In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User #1’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c. In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c stores Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3, Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware 20658 c 4, Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c5, Ringing Software 20658 c 6, Password Changing Software 20658 c 7,Device Locking Software 20658 c 8, and Power Off Software 20658 c 9.Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware 20658 c 5 is the software program described hereinafter.Ringing Software 20658 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Password Changing Software 20658 c 7 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Device Locking Software 20658 c 8 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Power Off Software 20658 c 9 isthe software program described hereinafter.

The following paragraphs illustrate the software programs which enablesthe user of Communication Device 200 to remotely control CommunicationDevice 200 by Personal Computer PC.

This paragraph illustrates User Authenticating Software H58 c 1 storedin Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of HostH, which authenticates the user of Communication Device 200 to implementthe present function via Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Personal Computer PC sends an access request to Host H viathe Internet (S1). Upon receiving the request from Personal Computer PC(S2) and the line is connected therebetween (S3), the user, by utilizingPersonal Computer PC, inputs both his/her password data (S4) and thephone number data of Communication Device 200 (S5). Host H initiates theauthentication process by referring to Password Data Storage Area H58 b1 and Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2) (S6). The authenticationprocess is completed (and the sequences described hereafter are enabledthereafter) if the password data and the phone number data described inS4 and S5 match with the data stored in Password Data Storage Area H58 b1 and Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2.

This paragraph illustrates Menu Introducing Software H58 c 2 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host H,which introduces the menu on Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Host H retrieves Web Display Data #0 from Web Display DataStorage Area H58 b 3 (S1), and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S2). Upon receiving Web Display Data #0 from Host H (S3), PersonalComputer PC displays Web Display Data #0 on its display (S4). The userselects from one of the buttons of ‘1’ through ‘6’ wherein the sequencesimplemented thereafter are described hereinafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Line Connecting Software H58 c 3 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which connect line between Host H and Communication Device 200. In thepresent embodiment, Host H calls Communication Device 200 by retrievingthe corresponding phone number data from Phone Number Data Storage AreaH58 b 2 (S1). Upon Communication Device 200 receiving the call from HostH (S2), the line is connected therebetween (S3). For the avoidance ofdoubt, the line is connected between Host H and Communication Device 200merely to implement the present function, and a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58 c 4stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 cof Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658 c 4 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c ofCommunication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200. Here, Communication Device 200 activatesVibrator 217 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is in the mannermode and outputs a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) whenCommunication Device 200 is not in the manner mode, upon receiving anincoming call. Assume that the user selects button ‘1’ displayed onPersonal Computer PC (S1). In response, Personal Computer PC sends thecorresponding signal to Host H via the Internet (S2). Host H, uponreceiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner mode deactivatingcommand to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the manner modedeactivating command from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200deactivates the manner mode (S5). Host H retrieves Web Display Data #1from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data #1 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7). Normally the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification tothe user that Communication Device 200 has received an incoming call,and a voice communication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call.In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c 5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing SoftwareH58 c 5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage AreaH58 c of Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c of Communication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200 and outputs a ringing sound thereafter. Assumethat the user selects button ‘2’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1).In response, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to HostH via the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a manner mode deactivating & device ringing command toCommunication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the manner modedeactivating & device ringing command from Host H (S4), CommunicationDevice 200 deactivates the manner mode (S5) and outputs a ring data fromSpeaker 216 (S6). Host H retrieves Web Display Data #2 from Web DisplayData Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S7). Upon receiving Web Display Data #2 from Host H, Personal ComputerPC displays the data (S8). Normally the purpose to output the ringingsound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification to the user thatCommunication Device 200 has received an incoming call, and a voicecommunication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call. Incontrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c 5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter byimplementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates Ringing Software H58 c 6 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Ringing Software 20658 c 6 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which output a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Assume that theuser selects button ‘3’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a device ringing command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S5). HostH retrieves Web Display Data #3 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving WebDisplay Data #3 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displays the data(S7). Normally the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216is to give a notification to the user that Communication Device 200 hasreceived an incoming call, and a voice communication is enabledthereafter upon answering the call. In contrast, the purpose to outputthe ringing sound from Speaker 216 by executing Ringing Software H58 c 6and Ringing Software 20658 c 6 is merely to let the user to identify thelocation of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates Password Changing Software H58 c 7 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Password Changing Software 20658 c 7 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which change the password necessary to operate Communication Device 200.Assume that the user selects button ‘4’ displayed on Personal ComputerPC (S1). In response, Personal Computer PC sends the correspondingsignal to Host H via the Internet (S2). The user then enters a newpassword data by utilizing Personal Computer PC (S3), which is sent toCommunication Device 200 by Host H (S4). Upon receiving the new passworddata from Host H (S5), Communication Device 200 stores the new passworddata in Password Data Storage Area 20658 b 1 and the old password datais erased (S6). Host H retrieves Web Display Data #4 from Web DisplayData Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S7). Upon receiving Web Display Data #4 from Host H, Personal ComputerPC displays the data (S8).

This paragraph illustrates Device Locking Software H58 c 8 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Device Locking Software 20658 c 8 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which lock Communication Device 200, i.e., nullify any input signalinput via Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). Assume that the user selects button‘5’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). In response, PersonalComputer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host H via the Internet(S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a devicelocking command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving thedevice locking command from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200 islocked thereafter, i.e., any input via Input Device 210 is nullifiedunless a password data matching to the one stored in Password DataStorage Area 20658 b 1 is entered (S5). Host H retrieves Web DisplayData #5 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data #5 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Power Off Software H58 c 9 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Power Off Software 20658 c 9 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which turn off the power of Communication Device 200. Assume that theuser selects button ‘6’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a power off command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Uponreceiving the power off command from Host H (S4), Communication Device200 turns off the power of itself (S5). Host H retrieves Web DisplayData #6 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data #6 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the shortcut icon displayingfunction which displays one or more of shortcut icons on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The user of Communication Device200 can execute the software programs in a convenient manner byselecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) the shortcut icons. Theforegoing software programs may be any software programs described inthis specification.

This paragraph illustrates the shortcut icons displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 by implementing the presentfunction. In this embodiment, three shortcut icons are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1), i.e., Shortcut Icon #1, Shortcut Icon #2, and ShortcutIcon #3. The user of Communication Device 200 can execute the softwareprograms by selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) one of theshortcut icons. For example, assume that Shortcut Icon #1 represents MSWord 97. By selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) Shortcut Icon#1, the user can execute MS Word 97 installed in Communication Device200 or Host H. Three shortcut icons are illustrated in the presentdrawing, however, only for purposes of simplifying the explanation ofthe present function. Therefore, as many shortcut icons equivalent tothe number of the software programs described in this specification maybe displayed on LCD 201, and the corresponding software programs may beexecuted by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Shortcut Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20659 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20659 a. In this embodiment,Shortcut Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20659 a includesShortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659 b and Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c. Shortcut Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20659 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter. Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659 b. In this embodiment, Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659 b includes Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b2, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3, and Selected ShortcutIcon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4. Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter.Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 storesthe data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’and ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores theshortcut icon IDs, and each shortcut icon ID is the identification ofthe corresponding shortcut icon image data stored in column ‘ShortcutIcon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’ stores the shortcuticon image data, and each shortcut icon image data is the image data ofthe shortcut icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659 b 1 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon ImageData #1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #2’ and the correspondingshortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data #2’; the shortcuticon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #3’ and the corresponding shortcut icon imagedata ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data #3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon #4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut IconImage Data #4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut IconID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ storesthe shortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data’ stores the shortcut icon location data, and each shortcuticon location data indicates the location displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)in (x,y) format of the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659 b 2 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon #1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data‘Shortcut Icon Location Data #1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data #2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #3’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #4’ and the correspondingshortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data #4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’and ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores theshortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon LinkData’ stores the shortcut icon link data, and each shortcut icon linkdata represents the location in Communication Device 200 of the softwareprogram stored therein represented by the shortcut icon of thecorresponding shortcut icon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon LinkData Storage Area 20659 b 3 stores the following data: the shortcut iconID ‘Shortcut Icon #1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data #1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #2’and the corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #3’ and the correspondingshortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data #3’; and the shortcuticon ID ‘Shortcut Icon #4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data #4’. The foregoing software program may be anysoftware program described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659 b 4. In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659 b 4 stores one or more of shortcut icon IDs.Only the shortcut icon image data of the shortcut icon IDs stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data StorageArea 20659 b 4 stores the following data: the shortcut icon IDs‘Shortcut Icon #1’, ‘Shortcut Icon #2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon #3’, whichmeans that only the shortcut icon image data corresponding to ‘ShortcutIcon #1’, ‘Shortcut Icon #2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon #3’ are displayed onLCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c. In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c stores Shortcut IconDisplaying Software 20659 c 1, Software Executing Software 20659 c 2,Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software 20659 c 3, and SoftwareExecuting Software 20659 c 4. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659 c1 is the software program described hereinafter. Software ExecutingSoftware 20659 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter.Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software 20659 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Software Executing Software 20659 c 4 isthe software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659 c 1stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c ofCommunication Device 200, which displays the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers to the shortcut icon IDs stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 to identify theshortcut icon image data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU211 then retrieves the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon IDs identified in S1 from Shortcut Icon Image Data StorageArea 20659 b 1 (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the shortcut iconlocation data of the corresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1from Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (S3). CPU 211displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) the shortcut icon image data thereafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software 20659 c 2 storedin Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c ofCommunication Device 200, which executes the corresponding softwareprogram upon selecting the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayedon LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcuticon ID of the shortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). CPU 211identifies the shortcut icon link data stored in Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3 from the shortcut icon ID identified in S2 (S3),and executes the corresponding software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software20659 c 3 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c of Communication Device 200, which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to change the location of the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayedon LCD 201 (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcut icon IDof the shortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). The user moves theshortcut icon selected in S1 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the newlocation thereof (S4), and updates the shortcut icon location datastored in Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (S5).

<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function—Executing Software in Host H>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the implementation of the presentinvention wherein the user of Communication Device 200 executes thesoftware programs stored in Host H by selecting the shortcut iconsdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Shortcut Icon Displaying Information StorageArea H59 a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area H59 a. In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Information Storage Area H59 a includes Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b and Shortcut Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area H59 c. Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area H59 bstores the data necessary to implement the present function on the sideof Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter. Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area H59 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b. In this embodiment, Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b includes Software Programs StorageArea H59 b 1. Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Software Programs StorageArea H59 b 1. In this embodiment, Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Software ID’ and ‘Software Program’.Column ‘Software ID’ stores the software IDs, and each software ID is anidentification of the software program stored in column ‘SoftwareProgram’. Column ‘Software Program’ stores the software programs. Inthis embodiment, Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1 stores thefollowing data: software ID ‘Software #3’ and the corresponding softwareprogram ‘Software Program #3’; software ID ‘Software #4’ and thecorresponding software program ‘Software Program #4’; software ID‘Software #5’ and the corresponding software program ‘Software Program#5’; and software ID ‘Software #6’ and the corresponding softwareprogram ‘Software Program #6’. Here, the software programs may be anysoftware programs which are stored in Host H described in thisspecification. As another embodiment, the software programs may be anysoftware programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area H59 c. In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Software Storage Area H59 c stores Software ExecutingSoftware H59 c 4. Software Executing Software H59 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software H59 c 4 stored inShortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area H59 c of Host H andSoftware Executing Software 20659 c 4 stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c of Communication Device 200, which executethe corresponding software program upon selecting the shortcut iconimage data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects theshortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenidentifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image data selectedin S1 (S2). CPU 211 identifies the shortcut icon link data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 from the shortcut icon IDidentified in S2 (S3), which is sent to Host H (S4). Upon receiving theshortcut icon link data from Communication Device 200 (S5), Host Hexecutes the corresponding software program (S6) and produces therelevant display data, which are send to Communication Device 200 (S7).Upon receiving the relevant display data from Host H, CommunicationDevice 200 displays the data on LCD 201 (S8).

<<Multiple Channel Processing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple channel processingfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to send and receive alarge amount of data in a short period of time by increasing the uploadand download speed.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Multiple Channel Processing InformationStorage Area H61 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter. Here, Host H is a base station whichcommunicates with Communication Device 200 in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Information Storage Area H61 a. In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area H61 a includesMultiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b and Multiple ChannelProcessing Software Storage Area H61 c. Multiple Channel Processing DataStorage Area H61 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b. In this embodiment, MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b includes User Data StorageArea H61 b 1, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2, and Signal Type DataStorage Area H61 b 3. User Data Storage Area H61 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 stores thedata described hereinafter. Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 storesthe data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area H61b 1. In this embodiment, User Data Storage Area H61 b 1 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘User Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores theuser IDs, and each user ID in an identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘User Data’ stores the user data, andeach user data represents the personal data of the user of thecorresponding user ID, such as name, home address, office address, phonenumber, email address, fax number, age, sex, credit card number of theuser of the corresponding user ID. In this embodiment, User Data StorageArea H61 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User #1’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data #1’; the user ID ‘User #2’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data #2’; the user ID ‘User #3’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data #3’; and the user ID ‘User #4’ andthe corresponding user data ‘User Data #4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Channel Number StorageArea H61 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’. Column ‘ChannelID’ stores the channel IDs, and each channel ID is an identification ofthe channel which is assigned to each Communication Device 200 andthrough which Host H and Communication Device 200 send and receive data.Normally one channel ID is assigned to one user ID. Column ‘User ID’stores the user IDs described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 stores the following data: the channel ID‘Channel #1’ and the user ID ‘User #1’; the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ withno corresponding user ID stored; the channel ID ‘Channel #3’ and theuser ID ‘User #3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ and the user ID ‘User#4’. Here, the foregoing data indicates that, to communicate with HostH, the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is utilized by Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User #1’; the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ is notutilized by any Communication Device 200 (i.e., vacant); the channel ID‘Channel #3’ is utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by theuser ID ‘User #3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ is utilized byCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #4’.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number StorageArea H61 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’.Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDs described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 stores the followingdata: the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ and the user ID ‘User #1’; the channelID ‘Channel #2’ and the user ID ‘User #1’; the channel ID ‘Channel #3’and the user ID ‘User #3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ and the userID ‘User #4’. Here, the foregoing data indicates that, to communicatewith Host H, the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is utilized by CommunicationDevice 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ is also utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by the userID ‘User #1’; the channel ID ‘Channel #3’ is utilized by CommunicationDevice 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #3’; and the channel ID‘Channel #4’ is utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by theuser ID ‘User #4’. In sum, the foregoing data indicates that two channelIDs, i.e., ‘Channel #1’ and ‘Channel #2’ are utilized by oneCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Signal Type Data StorageArea H61 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘Signal Type Data’. Column‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore. Column‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, and each signal typedata indicates the type of signal utilized for the channel representedby the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area H61 b 3 stores the following data: the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channel ID‘Channel #2’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’; thechannel ID ‘Channel #3’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘W-CDMA’;and the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicates that the channel identified bythe channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is assigned to the signal type data‘cdma2000’; the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ isassigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channel identified bythe channel ID ‘Channel #3’ is assigned to the signal type data‘W-CDMA’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ isassigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. Assuming that CommunicationDevice 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’ utilizes the channelsrepresented by the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ and ‘Channel #2’ as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 representedby the user ID ‘User #1’ utilizes the signal type data ‘cdma2000’ forthe channels represented by the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ and ‘Channel #2’for communicating with Host H.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in SignalType Data Storage Area H61 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area H61 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘Signal Type Data’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, andeach signal type data indicates the type of signal utilized for thechannel represented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment,Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 stores the following data: thechannel ID ‘Channel #1’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’; the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ and the corresponding signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’; the channel ID ‘Channel #3’ and the correspondingsignal type data ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel ID ‘Channel #4’ and thecorresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicatesthat the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is assignedto the signal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channel identified by thechannel ID ‘Channel #2’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘W-CDMA’;the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel #3’ is assigned to thesignal type data ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel identified by the channel ID‘Channel #4’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. Assumingthat Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’utilizes the channels represented by the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ and‘Channel #2’ as described hereinbefore. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’ utilizesthe signal type data in a hybrid manner for communicating with Host H,i.e., the signal type data ‘cdma2000’ for ‘Channel #1’ and the signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’ for ‘Channel #2’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in MultipleChannel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c. In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c stores SignalType Data Detecting Software H61 c 1, User ID Identifying Software H61 c2, Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 2 a, Channel Number AddingSoftware H61 c 3, Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a, Signal TypeData Adding Software H61 c 4, and Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c4 a. Signal Type Data Detecting Software H61 c 1 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. User ID Identifying Software H61 c 2 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Data Sending/Receiving SoftwareH61 c 2 a is the software program described hereinafter. Channel NumberAdding Software H61 c 3 is the software program described hereinafter.Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Signal Type Data Adding Software H61 c 4 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Data Sending/Receiving SoftwareH61 c 4 a is the software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 a of whichthe data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 a. In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 a includesMultiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b and MultipleChannel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c. Multiple ChannelProcessing Data Storage Area 20661 b stores the data necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Communication Device 200,such as the ones described hereinafter. Multiple Channel ProcessingSoftware Storage Area 20661 c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Communication Device 200,such as the ones described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple ChannelProcessing Software Storage Area 20661 c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b. In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b includes User DataStorage Area 20661 b 1, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2, andSignal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3. User Data Storage Area 20661 b1 stores the data described hereinafter. Channel Number Storage Area20661 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter. Signal Type DataStorage Area 20661 b 3 stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area20661 b 1. In this embodiment, User Data Storage Area 20661 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘User Data’. Column ‘User ID’stores the user ID which is an identification of Communication Device200. Column ‘User Data’ stores the user data represents the personaldata of the user of Communication Device 200, such as name, homeaddress, office address, phone number, email address, fax number, age,sex, credit card number of the user. In this embodiment, User DataStorage Area 20661 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User #1’and the corresponding user data ‘User Data #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Channel Number StorageArea 20661 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’. Column‘Channel ID’ stores the channel ID which is an identification of thechannel through which Host H and Communication Device 200 send andreceive data. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2stores the following data: the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ and thecorresponding user ID ‘User #1’. The foregoing data indicates that, tocommunicate with Host H, the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is utilized byCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in ChannelNumber Storage Area 20661 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel NumberStorage Area 20661 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘User ID’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs, and each channelID is an identification of the channel through which Host H andCommunication Device 200 send and receive data. Column ‘User ID’ storesthe user ID described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, Channel NumberStorage Area 20661 b 2 stores the following data: the channel ID‘Channel #1’ and the corresponding user ID ‘User #1’; and the channel ID‘Channel #2’ and the corresponding user ID ‘User #2’. The foregoing dataindicates that, to communicate with Host H, the channel IDs of ‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel #2’ are utilized by Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User #1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Signal Type Data StorageArea 20661 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘Signal Type Data’.Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore.Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, and each signaltype data indicates the type of signal utilized for the channelrepresented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment, SignalType Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 stores the following data: the channelID ‘Channel #1’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’; andthe channel ID ‘Channel #2’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicates that the channel identified bythe channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is assigned to the signal type data‘cdma2000’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ isassigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’ utilizesthe signal type data ‘cdma2000’ for the channels represented by thechannel ID ‘Channel #1’ and ‘Channel #2’ for communicating with Host H.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in SignalType Data Storage Area 20661 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area 20661 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘Signal Type Data’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, andeach signal type data indicates the type of signal utilized for thechannel represented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment,Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 stores the following data: thechannel ID ‘Channel #1’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’; and the channel ID ‘Channel #2’ and the corresponding signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’. The foregoing data indicates that the channelidentified by the channel ID ‘Channel #1’ is assigned to the signal typedata ‘cdma2000’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘W-CDMA’. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User #1’ utilizesthe signal type data in a hybrid manner for communicating with Host H,i.e., the signal type data ‘cdma2000’ for ‘Channel #1’ and the signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’ for ‘Channel #2’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in MultipleChannel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c. In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c stores SignalType Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1, User ID Identifying Software20661 c 2, Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a, Channel NumberAdding Software 20661 c 3, Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a,Signal Type Data Adding Software 20661 c 4, and Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20661 c 4 a. Signal Type Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1 isthe software program described hereinafter. User ID Identifying Software20661 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter. DataSending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a is the software program describedhereinafter. Channel Number Adding Software 20661 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3a is the software program described hereinafter. Signal Type Data AddingSoftware 20661 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter. DataSending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Signal Type Data Detecting Software H61 c 1of Host H and Signal Type Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1 ofCommunication Device 200, which detect the signal type utilized for thecommunication between Host H and Communication Device 200 from anysignal type categorized as 2G, 3G, and 4G. The detection of the signaltype is implemented by Host H in the present embodiment. In thisembodiment, Host H detects the signal type (S1), and stores the signaltype data in Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 at the defaultchannel number (in the present example, Channel #1) (S2). Host H thensends the signal type data to Communication Device 200 (S3). Uponreceiving the signal type data from Host H (S4), Communication Device200 stores the signal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b3 at the default channel number (in the present example, Channel #1)(S5).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Signal Type DataDetecting Software H61 c 1 of Host H and Signal Type Data DetectingSoftware 20661 c 1 of Communication Device 200, which detect the signaltype utilized for the communication between Host H and CommunicationDevice 200 from any signal type categorized as 2G, 3G, and 4G. Thedetection of the signal type is implemented by Communication Device 200in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 detects the signal type (S1), and stores thesignal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 at thedefault channel number (in the present example, Channel #1) (S2). CPU211 then sends the signal type data to Host H (S3). Upon receiving thesignal type data from Communication Device 200 (S4), Host H stores thesignal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 at the defaultchannel number (in the present example, Channel #1) (S5).

This paragraph illustrates User ID Identifying Software H61 c 2 of HostH and User ID Identifying Software 20661 c 2 of Communication Device200, which identify the user ID of the corresponding CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 sends the userID to Host H (S1). Upon receiving the User ID from Communication Device200 (S2), Host H identifies the default channel number (in the presentexample, Channel #1) for Communication Device 200 (S3), and stores theUser ID in Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 at the channel numberidentified in S3 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 2 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200. Inthis embodiment, Host H retrieves the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel #1) from Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2(S1), and sends data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) toCommunication Device 200 through the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel #1) retrieved in S1 (S2). Communication Device200 receives the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data)from Host H through the same channel number (S3).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H61 c 2 a of Host H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c2 a of Communication Device 200 by which Communication Device 200 sendsdata (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) to Host H. In thisembodiment, Communication Device 200 retrieves the default channelnumber (in the present example, Channel #1) from Channel Number StorageArea 20661 b 2 (S1), and sends data (e.g., audiovisual data andalphanumeric data) to Host H through the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel #1) retrieved in S1 (S2). Host H receives thedata (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) from CommunicationDevice 200 through the same channel number (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Channel Number Adding Software H61 c 3 ofHost H and Channel Number Adding Software 20661 c 3 of CommunicationDevice 200, which add another channel to increase the download and/orupload speed of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 sends a channel number adding request to Host H(S1). Upon receiving the channel number adding request fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H checks the availability in thesame signal type data (S3). Assuming that vacancy is found in the samesignal type data, Host H selects a new channel number (in the presentexample, Channel #2) from the available channel numbers forCommunication Device 200 (S4). Host H stores the user ID ofCommunication Device 200 in Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 at newchannel number (in the present example, Channel #2) selected in S4 (S5).Host H then sends the new channel number (in the present example,Channel #2) selected in S4 to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving the new channel number (in the present example, Channel #2)from Host H (S7), Communication Device 200 stores the new channel number(in the present example, Channel #2) in Channel Number Storage Area20661 b 2 (S8). As another embodiment, instead of Host H adding a newchannel number by receiving a channel number adding request fromCommunication Device 200, Host H may do so in its own initiative.

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200 byincreasing the download speed. In this embodiment, Host H retrieves thechannel numbers (in the present example, Channel #1 and #2) from ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 of the corresponding user ID (in the presentexample, User #1) (S1). Host H splits the data (e.g., audiovisual dataand alphanumeric data) to be sent to Communication Device 200 to theFirst Data and the Second Data (S2). Host H sends the First Data toCommunication Device 200 through Channel #1 (S3), and sends the SecondData to Communication Device 200 through Channel #2 (S4). CommunicationDevice 200 receives the First Data from Host H through Channel #1 (S5),and receives the Second Data from Host H through Channel #2 (S6).Communication Device 200 merges the First Data and the Second Datathereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Communication Device 200 sends data to Host H byincreasing the upload speed. In this embodiment, Communication Device200 retrieves the channel numbers (in the present example, Channels #1and #2) from Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S1). CommunicationDevice 200 splits the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumericdata) to be sent to Host H to the Third Data and the Fourth Data (S2).Communication Device 200 sends the Third Data to Host H through Channel#1 (S3), and sends the Fourth Data to Host H through Channel #2 (S4).Host H receives the Third Data from Communication Device 200 throughChannel #1 (S5), and receives the Fourth Data from Communication Device200 through Channel #2 (S6). Host H merges the Third Data and the FourthData thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Signal Type Data Adding Software H61 c 4 ofHost H and Signal Type Data Adding Software 20661 c 4 of CommunicationDevice 200, which add new channel in different signal type if noavailable channel is found in the same signal type in S3 describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Host H checks the availability inother signal type data (S1). Assuming that an available new channel isfound in W-CDMA. Host H selects a new channel number (in the presentexample, Channel #2) In Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 forCommunication Device 200 (S2). Host H stores the user ID (in the presentexample, User #1) in Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 at new channelnumber selected in S2 (in the present example, Channel #2) (S3). Host Hstores the signal type data (in the present example, W-CDMA) in SignalType Data Storage Area H61 b 3 at new channel number selected in S2 (inthe present example, Channel #2) (S4). Host H sends the new channelnumber (in the present example, Channel #2) and the new signal type data(in the present example, W-CDMA) to Communication Device 200 (S5).Communication Device 200 receives the new channel number (in the presentexample, Channel #2) and the new signal type data (in the presentexample, W-CDMA) from Host H (S6). Communication Device 200 stores thenew channel number (in the present example, Channel #2) in ChannelNumber Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S7). Communication Device 200 (in thepresent example, W-CDMA) in Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3(S8).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 4 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200 byincreasing the download speed. In this embodiment, Host H retrieves thechannel numbers (in the present example, Channel #1 and #2) from ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 of the corresponding user ID (in the presentexample, User #1) (S1). Host H splits the data (e.g., audiovisual dataand alphanumeric data) to be sent to Communication Device 200 to theFirst Data and the Second Data (S2). Host H sends the First Data toCommunication Device 200 through Channel #1 in cdma2000 (S3), and sendsthe Second Data to Communication Device 200 through Channel #2 in W-CDMA(S4). Communication Device 200 receives the First Data from Host Hthrough Channel #1 in cdma2000 (S5), and receives the Second Data fromHost H through Channel #2 in W-CDMA (S6). Communication Device 200merges the First Data and the Second Data thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 4 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Communication Device 200 sends data to Host H byincreasing the upload speed. In this embodiment, Communication Device200 retrieves the channel numbers (in the present example, Channel #1and #2) from Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S1). CommunicationDevice 200 splits the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumericdata) to be sent to Host H to the Third Data and the Fourth Data (S2).Communication Device 200 sends the Third Data to Host H through Channel#1 in cdma2000 (S3), and sends the Fourth Data to Host H through Channel#2 in W-CDMA (S4). Host H receives the Third Data from CommunicationDevice 200 through Channel #1 in cdma2000 (S5), and receives the FourthData from Communication Device 200 through Channel #2 in W-CDMA (S6).Host H merges the Third Data and the Fourth Data thereafter (S7).

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing other sets of combination of the signals, such as the 2Gsignal and the 3G signal. In order to implement this embodiment, theterm ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘2G’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘3G’ in the explanation set out hereinbefore for purposesof implementing the present embodiment. Here, the 2G signal may be ofany type of signal categorized as 2G, including, but not limited tocdmaOne, GSM, and D-AMPS; the 3G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 3G, including, but not limited to cdma2000, W-CDMA, andTDS-CDMA.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing other sets of combination of the signals, such as the 3Gsignal and the 4G signal. In order to implement this embodiment, theterm ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘3G’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘4G’ in the explanation set out hereinbefore for purposesof implementing the present embodiment. Here, the 3G signal may be ofany type of signal categorized as 3G, including, but not limited tocdma2000, W-CDMA, and TDS-CDMA, and the 4G signal may be of any type ofsignal categorized as 4G.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the first type of 4G signal and the second type of 4G signal.In order to implement this embodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ issubstituted by ‘the first type of 4G signal’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘the second type of 4G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the first type of 4G signaland the second type of 4G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 4G.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the 2G signal and the 3G signal. In order to implement thisembodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘the 2G signal’ andthe term ‘W-CDMA’ is substituted by ‘the 3G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the 2G signal may be of anytype of signal categorized as 2G, including, but not limited to cdmaOne,GSM, and D-AMPS, and the 3G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 3G, including, but not limited to cdma2000, W-CDMA, andTDS-CDMA.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the first type of 2G signal and the second type of 2G signal.In order to implement this embodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ issubstituted by ‘the first type of 2G signal’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘the second type of 2G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the first type of 2G signaland the second type of 2G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 2G, including, but not limited to cdmaOne, GSM, andD-AMPS.

In sum, the present function described hereinbefore may be utilized forprocessing any combination of any type of signals.

For the avoidance of doubt, the multiple signal processing function maybe utilized while implementing the present function.

of doubt, all software programs described hereinbefore to implement thepresent function may be executed solely by CPU 211 (FIG. 1) or by SignalProcessor 208 (FIG. 1), or by both CPU 211 and Signal Processor 208.

<<Cellular TV Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the cellular TV function of theCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, the cellular TV function of the Communication Device200 (FIG. 1) is exploited by the combination of TV Server TVS, Host H,Sub-host SHa, Sub-host SHb, Communication Device 200 a, andCommunication Device 200 b. TV Server TVS is electronically linked toHost H, which is also electronically linked to Sub-hosts SHa and SHb.Sub-hosts SHa and SHb are linked to Communication Devices 200 a and 200b in a wireless fashion. TV Server TVS stores a plurality of channeldata, which are explained in details hereinafter. A plurality of channeldata are transferred from TV Server TVS to Host H, which distributessuch data to Sub-hosts SHa and SHb. Sub-hosts SHa and SHb transfers theplurality of channel data to Communication Devices 200 a and 200 brespectively via Mobile Signal MS1, i.e., a plurality of wireless signalwhich enables Communication Devices 200 a and 200 b to communicate withSub-hosts SHa and SHb respectively in a wireless fashion, therebyenables to display the channel data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) installed oneach of Communication Devices 200 a and 200 b.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the cellular TVfunction of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1), which utilizes a network.TV Server TVS is electronically linked to Internet Server IS via NetworkNT, such as the Internet. Internet Server IS is linked to CommunicationDevice 200 in a wireless fashion. A plurality of channel data aredistributed from TV Server TVS to Internet Server IS via network NT,which transfers such data to Communication Device 200 via Mobile SignalMS, i.e., a plurality of wireless signal which enables CommunicationDevice 200 to communicate with Internet Server IS in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Server TVS. In thisembodiment, six kinds of channel data are stored. Namely, the channeldata regarding Channel 1 is stored in Area TVS1, the channel dataregarding Channel 2 is stored in Area TVS2, the channel data regardingChannel 3 is stored in Area TVS3, the channel data regarding Channel 4is stored in Area TVS4, the channel data regarding Channel 5 is storedin Area TVS5, and the channel data regarding Channel 6 is stored in AreaTVS6. Here, each channel data represents a specific TV program, i.e.,each channel data is primarily composed of a series of motion picturedata and a series of subtitle data which are designed to be displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) and a series of audio data which are designed to beoutput from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1) has the capabilityto display satellite TV programs. Broadcast center BC distributes aplurality of Satellite Signal SS to Satellite 304, which transfers thesame series of signals to Communication Device 200, both of which in awireless fashion. A plurality of Satellite Signal SS include a pluralityof channel data.

In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1) also has thecapability to display ground wave TV programs. Broadcast Center BCdistributes a plurality of channel data to Tower TW via a fixed cable,which transfers the plurality of channel data via ground wave, i.e.,Ground Wave Signal GWS to Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the basic structure of Signal Processor 208(FIG. 1). Signal processor 208 is primarily composed of Voice SignalProcessor 208 a, Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 b, TV Signal Processor208 c, and Splitter 208 d. Splitter 208 d distributes a plurality ofwireless signals received from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) to Voice SignalProcessor 208 a, Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 b, and TV SignalProcessor 208 c. Voice Signal Processor 208 a processes the voice signalreceived via Antenna 218 and decodes such signal so as to output thevoice signal from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 bprocesses various kinds of non-voice signals, such as, but not limitingto, channel controlling signals, GPS signals, and internet signals, soas to format and decode the received signals to be readable by CPU 211(FIG. 1). Packet signals, i.e., a series of signals composed of packets,are also processed by Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 b. Packet signalsrepresenting voice signals are also processed by Non-Voice SignalProcessor 208 b. TV Signal Processor 208 c processes the plurality ofwireless signals received in the manners described in FIGS. 88, 89, 91,and 92 in order for the channel data included therein to be decoded andthereby be output from LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and Speaker 216 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the basic structure of TV Signal Processor208 c described hereinbefore. TV Signal Processor 208 c is primarilycomposed of Mobile Signal Processor 208 c 1, Satellite Signal Processor208 c 2, and Ground Wave Signal Processor 208 c 3. Mobile SignalProcessor 208 c 1 processes a plurality of mobile signals received inthe manners described hereinbefore in order for the channel dataincluded therein to be decoded and thereby be output from LCD 201(FIG. 1) and Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Satellite Signal Processor 208 c 2processes a plurality of Satellite Signal SS received in the mannerdescribed hereinbefore in order for the channel data included therein tobe decoded and thereby be output from LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and Speaker 216(FIG. 1). Ground Wave Signal Processor 208 c 3 processes a plurality ofGround Wave Signal GWS received in the manner described hereinbefore inorder for the channel data included therein to be decoded and thereby beoutput from LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and Speaker 216 (FIG. 1).

As another embodiment of the present invention, Voice Signal Processor208 a, Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 b, and TV Signal Processor 208 cmay be integrated and merged into one circuit and eliminate Splitter 208d in order to highly integrate Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the format of the plurality of channel datatransferred described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a plurality ofchannel data can be distributed in a TDMA format. In this embodiment,Channel Data CH1 is divided into CH1 a and CH1 b, Channel Data CH2 isdivided into CH2 a and CH2 b, and Channel Data CH3 is divided into CH3 aand CH3 b, and transferred. Instead of ‘chopping’ each channel data,Channel Data CH1, CH2, and CH3 can be transferred in differentfrequencies (FDMA format) or scramble all of them and transfer within acertain width of frequency (CDMA or W-CDMA).

This paragraph illustrates the menu displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 has an option toselect one of the functions installed in Communication Device 200.Namely, the user can, by manipulation of Input Device 210 or by thevoice recognition system, utilize Communication Device 200 as a cellularphone by selecting ‘1. Phone’, as an email editor and send and/orreceive emails by selecting ‘2. Email’, as a TV monitoring device byselecting ‘3. TV’, as a word processor by selecting ‘4. Memo’, and as anInternet accessing device by selecting ‘5. Internet’. In thisembodiment, a TV screen is displayed on LCD 201 by selecting ‘3. TV’.

This paragraph illustrates the software program which administers theoverall function explained hereinbefore. From the kind of the inputsignal input from Input Device 210 or by the voice recognition system,the related function assigned to such input signal is activated by CPU211 (FIG. 1) (S1). For example, a phone function is activated when inputsignal ‘1’ is input from Input Device 210 (S2 a), an email function isactivated when input signal ‘2’ is input from Input Device 210 (S2 b), aTV monitoring function is activated when input signal ‘3’ is input fromInput Device 210 (S2 c), a word processing function is activated wheninput signal ‘4’ is input from Input Device 210 (S2 d), and an internetfunction is activated when input signal ‘5’ is input from Input Device210 (S2 e). Another function can be selected from the menu describedhereinbefore via Input Device 210 or by the voice recognition systemafter selecting one function, and enables to activate one function whilethe other function is still running (S3). For example, the user canutilize the phone function while watching TV, or access the Internetwhile utilizing the phone function.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) inorder to implement the foregoing functions. Voice Data Calculating Area206 a 208 c 3 stores a software program to implement the phone functionas described in S2 a hereinbefore, and Voice Data Storage Area 206 bstores the voice data received from or sending via Voice SignalProcessor 208 a. Email Data Calculating Area 206 c stores a softwareprogram to implement the email function as described in S2 bhereinbefore, and Email Data Storage Area 206 d stores the email datareceived from or sending via Non-Voice Signal Processor 208 b. TV DataCalculating Area 206 e stores a software program to implement thecellular TV function as described in S2 c hereinbefore, and TV DataStorage Area 206 f stores the channel data received from TV SignalProcessor 208 c. Text Data Calculating Area 206 g stores a softwareprogram to implement the word processing function as described in S2 dhereinbefore, and Text Data Storage Area 206 h stores a series of textdata which are input and/or edited by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system. Internet Data Calculating Area 206 i stores asoftware program to implement the Internet function as described in S2 ehereinbefore, and Internet Data Storage Area 206 j stores a series ofinternet data, such as, but not limited to, HTML data, XML data, imagedata, audio/visual data, and other various types of data received fromNon-Voice Signal Processor 208 b. Some types of voice data, such as thevoice data in a form of packet received from or sending via Non-VoiceSignal Processor 208 b may be stored in Voice Data Storage Area 206 b.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in TV Data StorageArea 206 f described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, three types ofchannel data are stored in TV Data Storage Area 206 f Namely, channeldata regarding Channel 1 is stored in Area 206 f 1, channel dataregarding Channel 2 is stored in Area 206 f 2, and channel dataregarding Channel 3 is stored in Area 206 f 3. Here, each channel datais primarily composed of a series of motion picture data and a series ofsubtitle data which are designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) anda series of audio data which are designed to be output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the structure of Video Processor 202described in FIG. 1. Email Data Processing Area 202 a processes theemail data stored in Email Data Storage Area 206 d to be displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). TV Data Processing Area 202 b processes the channeldata stored in TV Data Storage Area 206 f to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). Text Data Processing Area 202 c processes the text data storedin Text Data Storage Area 206 h to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).Internet Data Processing Area 202 d processes the internet data storedin Internet Data Storage Area 206 j to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).As another embodiment of the present invention, Email Data ProcessingArea 202 a, TV Data Processing Area 202 b, Text Data Processing Area 202c, and Internet Data Processing Area 202 d may be merged into onecircuit and delegate its function to CPU 211 (FIG. 1) in order to highlyintegrate Video Processor 202.

<<Cellular TV—Incoming Message Notice Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the function of displaying a noticeof incoming message.

In this embodiment, Message MS1 is shown at the upper right corner ofLCD 201 (FIG. 1) indicating that a new email has arrived while TVmonitoring function is implemented.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Email Data CalculatingArea 206 c and Email Data Storage Area 206 d in order to implement theincoming message function. Email Data Calculating Area 206 c includesIncoming Message Calculating Area 206 k which stores a software programprogram described hereinafter, and Email Data Storage Area 206 dincludes Message Data Storage Area (MS1) 206 m which stores the textdata of MS1 (in the present example, the text data ‘Email’ as shownhereinbefore).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in IncomingMessage Calculating Area 206 k. First of all, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checkswhether a new incoming message has arrived by scanning Email DataStorage Area 206 d (S1). If a new message has arrived (S2), CPU 211retrieves the text data (MS1) from Message Data Storage Area (MS1) 206 mand displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore for aspecified period of time (S3). The software program is executedperiodically with a fixed interval.

<<Cellular TV—Video Recording Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the function of video recording theTV programs, i.e., a series of channel data, of Communication Device 200(FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, Message MS2 is shown on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when thevideo recording function is implemented, and Message MS3 is shown whenthe implementation of the video recording function has been terminated.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in TV Data CalculatingArea 206 e and TV Data Storage Area 206 f in order to implement thevideo recording function. TV Data Calculating Area 206 e includes VideoRecord Calculating Area 206 n which stores a software program toimplement the present function which is further explained in detailshereinafter. TV Data Storage Area 206 f includes Video Data Storage Area206 o and Message Data Storage Area (MS2, MS3) 206 p. Video Data StorageArea 206 o stores the recorded channel data retrieved from TV DataStorage Area 206 f, more specifically from either Area 206 f 1, Area 206f 2, or Area 206 f 3 described hereinbefore. Video Storage Area 206 o isdivided into several sectors (not shown), therefore a plurality ofchannel data can be recorded and stored simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video RecordCalculating Area 206 n. When a certain channel data (i.e., TV program)has been selected and start recording signal has been input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the recording process, i.e., retrieves the relevantchannel data from either Area 206 f 1, Area 206 f 2, or Area 206 f 3described hereinbefore and stores in one sector (not shown) in VideoData Storage Area 206 o (S2). During the recording process, the textdata of Message MS2 is retrieved from Message Data Storage Area (MS2,MS3) 206 p and displayed at the upper right corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1)as described hereinbefore indicating that the video recording functionis in process (S3). If the stop recording signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system indicating tostop the video recording process (S4), CPU 211 stops the video recordingprocess (S5), and retrieves the text data of Message MS3 from MessageData Storage Area (MS2, MS3) 206 p and displays at the upper rightcorner of LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S6). Since VideoStorage Area 206 o is divided into several sectors as stated above, S1from S6 can be repeated to record and store a plurality of channel datasimultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video RecordCalculating Area 206 n to playback the recorded channel data. First, achannel data is selected and playback signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Once thesesignals are received, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates the playback process ofthe recorded channel data, i.e., CPU 211 retrieves the selected channeldata from Video Data Storage Area 206 o, and TV data processing Area 202b of Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processes the channel data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). This playback process continuesuntil a stop playback signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 orvia voice recognition system (S3). When a stop playback signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system, CPU 211stops the foregoing processes, and retrieves the text data of MessageMS3 from Message Data Storage Area (MS2, MS3) 206 p and displays at theupper right corner of LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S4).

<<Cellular TV—Screen Shot Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the function of screen shot ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1), i.e., a function to capture thescreen displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and store it as a single image.

In this embodiment, Message MS4 is shown on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when thescreen shot function is implemented.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in TV Data CalculatingArea 206 e and TV Data Storage Area 206 f in order to implement thescreen shot function. TV Data Calculating Area 206 e includes ScreenShot Calculating Area 206 q which stores a software program to implementthe present function which is further explained in details hereinafter.TV Data Storage Area 206 f includes Screen Shot Data Storage Area 206 rand Message Data Storage Area (MS4) 206 s. Screen Shot Data Storage Area206 r stores the recorded image data retrieved from TV Data Storage Area206 f, more specifically from either Area 206 f 1, Area 206 f 2, or Area206 f 3 described hereinbefore. Screen Shot Storage Area 206 r isdivided into several sectors (not shown), therefore a plurality of imagedata can be recorded and stored simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Screen ShotCalculating Area 206 q. When a start recording signal has been input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates the recording process, i.e., retrievesan image data, which is currently displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), fromthe relevant area of TV Data Storage Area 206 f, i.e., from either Area206 f 1, Area 206 f 2, or Area 206 f 3 described hereinbefore, andstores in one of the sectors (not shown) in Screen Shot Data StorageArea 206 r (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the text data of Message MS4 fromMessage Data Storage Area (MS4) 206 s and displays at the upper rightcorner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore for a specificperiod of time indicating that the screen shot function is implemented(S3). Then CPU 211 retrieves the image data which is just stored inScreen Shot Data Storage Area 206 r, and TV Data Processing Area 202 bof Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processes the image data to be displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specific period of time (S4). Since screenshot storage Area 206 r is divided into several sectors as stated above,S1 from S4 can be repeated to record and store a plurality of imagedata.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Screen ShotCalculating Area 206 q to display the recorded image data. First, animage data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). When this signal is received, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the display process of the recorded image data, i.e.,CPU 211 retrieves the selected image data from Screen Shot Data StorageArea 206 r, and TV Data Processing Area 202 b of Video Processor 202(FIG. 1) processes the image data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S2). The image data is displayed until a close signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When aclose signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system, CPU 211 terminates to display the image data (S4).

<<Cellular TV—Timer Video Recording Function (1)>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the timer video recording functionof Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1), i.e., a function to video recordthe TV programs (a series of channel data) at specified times.

This paragraph illustrates the items which are input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. In this embodiment,the items which are input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system are displayed on LCD 201. Here, the items are thechannel number to be recorded, the start time from which the recordingshould be started (including day, date, and time), the stop time untilwhich the recording should be continued (including day, date, and time),and the mode which represents the high quality mode, the standard mode,the ‘x3 mode’ and the ‘x6 mode’. The high quality mode records theselected TV program (i.e., channel data) with the best quality, however,the available length of time to record is limited. The standard moderecords the selected TV program with the standard quality, and theavailable length of time to record is fairly long. The ‘x3 mode’ recordsthe selected TV program with lesser quality compared to the standardmode, however, the available length of time to record is fairly longcompared to the standard mode. The ‘x6 mode’ records the selected TVprogram with lesser quality compared to the ‘x3 mode’, however, theavailable length of time to record is fairly long compared to the ‘x3mode’.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video RecordCalculating Area 206 n to specify the items described hereinbefore.First of all, the channel number is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the start time(S2), the stop time (S3), and the mode (S4) are input and/or selected inthe same manner. Once the foregoing steps are completed, more series ofS1 through S4 can be repeated as many as the user of CommunicationDevice 200 desires (S5). Namely, the function of timer video recordingenables to timer record more than one TV programs (i.e., a plurality ofchannel data).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video RecordCalculating Area 206 n to implement the timer video recording function.Once the function of timer video recording is initiated by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211(FIG. 1) checks the current time (S2). If the current time matches thestart time specified by the process described in S2 of hereinbefore(S3), then CPU 211 identifies the channel number to be recorded and themode selected of which the details are explained in S4 of hereinbefore(S4), and initiates the recording process of the TV program (i.e.,channel data) (S5). CPU 211 continues the recording process until thecurrent time matches the stop time specified by the process described inS3 of hereinbefore (S6). The recording process is terminated when thecurrent time matches the stop time (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in video data storage Area206 o. In this embodiment, Video Data Storage Area 206 o is divided intocertain areas in order to store a plurality of channel data. In thisembodiment, the TV programs (a plurality of channel data) of channelnumbers 1, 2, and 3 are stored in Areas 206 o 1, 206 o 2, and 206 o 3,respectively. Since Video Data Storage Area 206 o is divided intocertain areas and thereby enables to store a plurality of channel data(here, the channel data of Channel 1, 2, and 3), a plurality of channeldata (more than one TV programs) can be recorded simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the area in which the items describedhereinbefore are stored. In this embodiment, the data regarding thechannel number to be recorded, the start time from which the recordingshould be started (including day, date, and time), the stop time untilwhich the recording should be continued (including day, date, and time),and the mode which represents the high quality mode, the standard mode,the ‘x3 mode’ and the ‘x6 mode’ are stored in Timer Data Storage Area206 t of RAM 206 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the details of Timer Data Storage Area 206 t.Timer Data Storage Area 206 t is composed of two types of areas. Thefirst area administers the current time, and the second area stores theitems explained hereinbefore. Here, the first area is Timer 206 t 4 andprovides the current time to CPU 211 (FIG. 1), which is utilized in S3(initiation of the video recording) and S6 (termination of the videorecording) of the flowchart described hereinbefore. The second area isdescribed as Areas 206 t 1, 206 t 2, and 206 t 3. The number of thesecond area corresponds with the number of the areas allocated in VideoData Storage Area 206 o explained hereinbefore. Each of Areas 206 t 1,206 t 2, and 206 t 3 stores the data regarding the channel number to berecorded, the start time from which the recording should be started(including day, date, and time), the stop time until which the recordingshould be continued (including day, date, and time), and the mode whichrepresents the high quality mode, the standard mode, the ‘x3 mode’ andthe ‘x6 mode’. In sum, Area 206 t 1 stores the start time, the stoptime, and the mode for Channel 1, Area 206 t 2 stores the start time,the stop time, and the mode for Channel 2, and Area 206 t 3 stores thestart time, the stop time, and the mode for Channel 3.

<<Cellular TV—PC Download Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the function to download varioustypes of data stored in Communication Device 200 to a personal computer.

This paragraph illustrates the basic components to implement the presentfunction. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 transmits aseries of PC Download Signal PDS to Personal Computer PC. Such sequenceis performed under the control of CPU 211 (FIG. 1). PC Download SignalPDS carries a plurality of data stored in Communication Device 200, morespecifically in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). Logically any types of data can betransmitted from Communication Device 200 to Personal Computer PC. Forexample, data, software program, and other various types of informationstored in Voice Data Calculating Area 206 a 208 c 3, Voice Data StorageArea 206 b, Email Data Calculating Area 206 c, Email Data Storage Area206 d, TV Data Calculating Area 206 e, TV Data Storage Area 206 f, TextData Calculating Area 206 g, Text Data Storage Area 206 h, Internet DataCalculating Area 2061, Internet Data Storage Area 206 j, all of whichare stored in RAM 206 as explained hereinbefore, can be transmitted fromCommunication Device 200 to Personal Computer PC.

The method of transmitting a series of PC Download Signal PDS can bearranged in several ways. The first method is to transmit a series of PCDownload Signal PDS directly from Communication Device 200 to PersonalComputer PC as described hereinbefore. In this method, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)first of all scans the target (i.e., data, software program, or othertypes of information to be transmitted) and PC Download Signal PDS,which carries such target, is directly transmitted to Personal ComputerPC via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion. In order to implementthe first method, Personal Computer PC must have the capability to sendand receive data in a wireless fashion. The second method is to transmita series of PC Download Signal PDS indirectly from Communication Device200 to Personal Computer PC utilizing network, such as the Internet. Inthis method, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) first of all scans the target (i.e., data,software program, or other types of information to be transmitted) andPC Download Signal PDS, which carries such target, is transmitted to acomputer (e.g., the Internet server, however, not shown) or a computerconnected thereto (not shown) in a wireless fashion. Here, the computer(e.g., the Internet server) or the computer connected thereto has thecapability to send and receive data in a wireless fashion. The computer(e.g., the Internet server) or the computer connected thereto isconnected to the network (e.g., the Internet). Then the computer (e.g.,the Internet server) or the computer connected thereto transmits thetarget to Personal Computer PC via network by an ordinary methodcommonly utilized to transfer data via network. No capability forPersonal Computer PC to send and receive data in a wireless fashion isrequired in this method. The third method is to transmit a series of PCDownload Signal PDS indirectly from Communication Device 200 to personalcomputer utilizing artificial satellite (not shown). In this method, CPU211 (FIG. 1) first of all scans the target (i.e., data, softwareprogram, or other types of information to be transmitted) and PCDownload Signal PDS, which carries such target, is transmitted to anartificial satellite in a wireless fashion. The satellite is connectedto a network (e.g., the Internet, however, not shown). Then thesatellite transmits the target to Personal Computer PC via network by anordinary method commonly utilized to transfer data from a satellite vianetwork to a computer connected thereto. No capability for PersonalComputer PC to send and receive data in a wireless fashion is requiredin this method.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in a specificarea of RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the present function. In thisembodiment, a list of data, software program, and other various types ofinformation stored in RAM 206 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) under thecontrol of CPU 211 (FIG. 1) (S1). In the next step, one or more of data,software program, and other various types of information, which are tobe the components of the target, are selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The method oftransmitting the target is selected in the same manner (S3). Once astart signal indicating to initiate the downloading process is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S4), thedownloading process is initiated by the method selected in S3 (S5) untilthe target is completely downloaded to Personal Computer PC (S6). OnceCPU 211 (FIG. 1) detects that the target has been completely downloadedto Personal Computer PC to the last bit, the downloading process isterminated (S7).

<<Cellular TV—Sending by Email Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the method to send the recorded TVprogram (i.e., channel data) and screen shot data via emails.

This paragraph illustrates the items displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Byway of utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or the voice recognitionsystem, the receiver's address is typed in ‘Email Address’ column,another email address is typed in ‘CC’ column, the title or the subjectof the email is typed in ‘Subject’ column, the locations of recorded TVprogram (i.e., channel data) and/or screen shot data in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)are typed in ‘Attachment’, and a series of text data, i.e., a message tothe receiver of the email is typed in ‘Text’ column.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) forpurposes of sending the recorded TV program (i.e., channel data) andscreen shot data via emails. In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1)includes four areas to implement the present function, i.e., EmailInformation Storage Area 206 u, Email Information Calculating Area 206v, Video Data Storage Area 206 w, and Screen Shot Data Storage Area 206x. Email Information Storage Area 206 u stores the information regardingthe items explained hereinbefore, namely the receiver's address typed in‘Email Address’ column, another email address typed in ‘CC’ column, thetitle or the subject of the email typed in ‘Subject’ column, thelocations of recorded TV program (i.e., channel data) and/or screen shotdata in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) typed in ‘Attachment’, and a series of textdata, i.e., a message to the receiver of the email typed in ‘Text’column. Email Information Calculating Area 206 v stores the softwareprogram explained hereinafter. Video Data Storage Area 206 w stores therecorded TV program (i.e., channel data) which is to be attached to andsent by the email. Screen Shot Data Storage Area 206 x stores the screenshot data which is to be attached to and sent by the email.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in EmailInformation Calculating Area 206 v. First, all the items describedhereinbefore are input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or thevoice recognition system (S1). Once a send signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system indicating to send theemail (S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) attaches the recorded TV program (i.e.,channel data) and/or the screen shot data stored in Video Data StorageArea 206 w and/or Screen Shot Data Storage Area 206 x(53), and the emailis sent to the receiver's email address (S4).

As another embodiment, Video Data Storage Area 206 w and Screen ShotData Storage Area 206 x may be omitted, and the recorded TV program(i.e., channel data) may be retrieved directly from Video Data StorageArea 206 o (FIGS. 106 and/or 116) and the screen shot data may beretrieved directly from Screen Shot Data Storage Area 206 r.

<<Cellular TV—EZ Recording Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the EZ recording function, which isan improvement of the function of the timer video recording illustratedin FIGS. 113 through 118. The EZ recording function provides an easy andconvenient method to input some of the items displayed on LCD 201 (FIG.1), i.e., the channel number to be recorded, the start time from whichthe recording should be started (including day, date, and time), thestop time until which the recording should be continued (including day,date, and time).

This paragraph illustrates the method to input the above mentioned itemsutilizing the EZ recording function. In this embodiment, a TV listingwhich presents the channel number, the time from which the TV programstarts and the time until which the TV program continues is displayed onLCD 201. For example, TV Program Pr 1 is shown on Channel 1 and startsfrom 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 2 is shown onChannel 1 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at 8:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr3 is shown on Channel 1 and starts from 8:00 p.m. and ends at 9:00 p.m.;TV Program Pr 4 is shown on Channel 2 and starts from 6:00 p.m. and endsat 8:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 5 is shown on Channel 2 and starts from 8:00p.m. and ends at 9:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 6 is shown on Channel 3 andstarts from 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; and TV Program Pr 7 isshown on Channel 3 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at 9:00 p.m. TheTV program displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected by way of utilizingthe cursor displayed thereon. In the present example, the cursor islocated on TV Program Pr 2.

This paragraph illustrates the software program to implement the EZrecording function. First of all, the TV program which is to be recordedis selected by moving the cursor displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the cursor currently located on TV Program Pr 2 can be movedup and highlight TV Program Pr 1, or instead moved down and highlight TVProgram Pr 3. The cursor can move left and highlight TV Program Pr 4.The highlighted TV program is the object of the EZ recording function,and when a specific key is entered by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores thechannel number, the start time, and the stop time in Timer Data StorageArea 206 t as described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 storesChannel 1 as the channel number, 7:00 p.m. as the start time, and 8:00p.m. as the stop time in Area 206 t 1 of Timer Data Storage Area 206 t(S1). Next, the mode is selected (S2). The mode represents the highquality mode, the standard mode, the ‘x3 mode’ and the ‘x6 mode’. Here,the high quality mode records the selected TV program (i.e., channeldata) with the best quality, however, the available length of time torecord is limited. The standard mode records the selected TV programwith the standard quality, and the available length of time to record isfairly long. The ‘x3 mode’ records the selected TV program with lesserquality compared to the standard mode, however, the available length oftime to record is fairly long compared to the standard mode. The ‘x6mode’ records the selected TV program with lesser quality compared tothe ‘x3 mode’, however, the available length of time to record is fairlylong compared to the ‘x3 mode’ as described hereinbefore. The method ofselecting the mode is same to the one explained in S4 hereinbefore. Thesequence of S1 and S2 can be repeated, and has the same function of thesoftware program explained hereinbefore, namely a plurality of TVprograms can be timer recorded simultaneously (S3). In this embodiment,TV programs Pr 1, Pr 4, and Pr 6 can be timer recorded simultaneously.All the relevant data are stored in Timer Data Storage Area 206 t. Oncesetting the channel number, the start time, the stop time, and the modeare selected by the above mentioned method, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) starts thetimer mode. By way of starting the timer mode, the software programexplained hereinbefore is initiated (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Server TVS. In thisembodiment, TV Server TVS contains TV Listing Storage Area TVS 7 tostore the updated data of the TV listings which are displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) on demand.

<<Cellular TV—Subtitle Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the function to display subtitles onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, Subtitle ST is shown on the lower portion of LCD 201(FIG. 1) when TV screen is displayed thereon.

This paragraph illustrates the software program to implement thefunction to display Subtitle ST on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). When specificsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system indicating to display Subtitle ST (S1), CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves a series of subtitle data from RAM 206 (FIG. 1) anddisplays Subtitle ST on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the relevant information stored in RAM 206(FIG. 1) in order to implement the function to display Subtitle ST. Inthis embodiment, TV Data Calculating Area 206 e includes Subtitle DataCalculating Area 206 e 1 which stores the software program explainedhereinbefore. In addition, TV Data Storage Area 206 f includes SubtitleData Storage Area 206 f 1 which stores a plurality of text data whichare designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) after being processedby Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1). Two types of text data are stored,i.e., the text code data and the text image data. The text code dataidentifies the specific text, such as ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’, and the textimage data represents the image of each text of ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’ whichare to be displayed on LCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the method to process the text data stored inSubtitle Data Storage Area 206 f 1 in order to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). In this embodiment, TV Data Processing Area 202 b includesSubtitle Data Processing Area 202 b 1. First of all, a series of textcode data are retrieved from Subtitle Data Storage Area 206 f 1 underthe administration of CPU 211 (FIG. 1). Then a series of correspondingtext image data are retrieved from Subtitle Data Storage Area 206 f 1under the administration of CPU 211. The retrieved text image data arethen transferred to Subtitle Data Processing Area 202 b 1. Subtitle DataProcessing Area 202 b 1 processes the retrieved text image data toproduce a series of real images (such as adding colors) and theprocessed images are displayed on LCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the information received in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1). The information can be received in aTDMA format. In this embodiment, three channel data, i.e., Channel Data1, Channel Data 2, and Channel Data 3 are received in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218. When utilizing the TDMA format, each channel data andthe corresponding subtitle data are divided in to packets, and eachpacket is transferred and received in turn as described hereinbefore.Namely, the first portion of Channel Data 1 (CH1 a) and the firstportion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD1 a) are included in thefirst packet, the first portion of Channel Data 2 (CH2 a) and the firstportion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD2 a) are included in thesecond packet, the first portion of Channel Data 3 (CH3 a) and the firstportion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD3 a) are included in thethird packet, the second portion of Channel Data 1 (CH1 b) and thesecond portion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD1 b) are includedin the fourth packet, the second portion of Channel Data 2 (CH2 b) andthe second portion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD2 b) areincluded in the fifth packet, and the second portion of Channel Data 3(CH3 b) and the second portion of the corresponding subtitle data (SD3b) are included in the sixth packet.

On the other hand, the information can be received in a CDMA format orFDMA format. Under these formats, channel data and the correspondingsubtitle data can be transferred and received seamlessly compared to theTDMA format. In this embodiment, Channel Data CH1 and the correspondingSubtitle Data SD1, Channel Data CH2 and the corresponding Subtitle DataSD2, and Channel Data CH3 and the corresponding Subtitle Data SD3 aretransferred and received simultaneously by utilizing CDMA and/or FDMAformat.

<<Cellular TV—Pay Per View Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the PPV (pay per view) function ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, TV Data Calculation Area 206 e includes DecoderStorage Area 206 e 2, i.e., an area which stores a software program todecode a series of encoded channel data. TV Data Storage Area 206 fincludes Encoded TV Data Storage Area 206 f 2, i.e., an area whichstores a series of encoded channel data received via Antenna 218(FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion, and Authenticated TV Program InformationStorage Area 206 f 3, i.e., an area which stores information regardingthe authenticated TV programs.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the decoder stored in DecoderStorage Area 206 e 2. First of all, a specific TV program (i.e., channeldata) is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via thevoice recognition system (S1). The decoder then retrieves theinformation stored in Authenticated TV Program Information Storage Area206 f 3 and identifies whether the selected TV program is authenticated(S2). If the selected TV program is authenticated, decoder decodes theencoded channel data stored in Encoded TV Data Storage Area 206 f 2(S3). The decoded channel data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) viaVideo Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S4).

The software program, in this embodiment, updates the information storedin Authenticated TV Program Information Storage Area 206 f 3. Thesoftware program is stored in either TV Server TVS or CommunicationDevice 200 (FIG. 1). First of all, the payment status of the monthly feepaid by the user of Communication Device 200 is checked periodically,for example at the end of each month (S1). If the monthly payment is notyet paid (S2), and the grace period (e.g., 10 days) for paying themonthly fee has already been expired (S3), the decoder stored in DecoderStorage Area 206 e 2 is erased therefrom and thereby PPV function is nolonger available (S4). As another embodiment, the decoder can be frozeninstead of being erased for future use.

PPV function applies to each TV program, i.e., authentication processapplies to each TV program (i.e., channel data) and enables the TVprogram to be viewed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) only when such TV program isauthenticated. However, as another embodiment, PPV function can beapplied to each channel number. For example, a whole channel number,such as Channel 3 hereinbefore, can be blocked and enabled to be viewedby PPV function only when such channel is authenticated.

<<Cellular TV—Timer Video Recording Function (2)>>

This paragraph illustrates the second embodiment of the timer videorecording function, i.e., the function to video record the TV programs(a plurality of channel data) at specified times of Communication Device200 (FIG. 1). The primary difference between the timer video recordingfunction illustrated hereinbefore (the second embodiment) and the oneexplained hereinbefore (the first embodiment) is that the former storesthe series of channel data in a personal computer which is a separatedevice from Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1) whereas the latter storesthe series of channel data in Communication Device 200 itself.

In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 is connected with PersonalComputer PC via Network NT. Communication Device 200 and Network NT areelectronically linked. Personal computer PC is a computer which iselectronically linked to Network NT, such as the Internet. CommunicationDevice 200 transfers to Personal Computer PC a set of Timer VideoRecording Signal TVRS, the details of which is explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the items which are input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. In this embodiment,the items are displayed on LCD 201, i.e., the channel number to berecorded, the start time from which the recording should be started(including day, date, and time), the stop time until which the recordingshould be continued (including day, date, and time), and the mode whichrepresents the high quality mode, the standard mode, the ‘x3 mode’ andthe ‘x6 mode’. Here, the high quality mode records the selected TVprogram (i.e., channel data) with the best quality, however, theavailable length of time to record is limited. The standard mode recordsthe selected TV program with the standard quality, and the availablelength of time to record is fairly long. The ‘x3 mode’ records theselected TV program with lesser quality compared to the standard mode,however, the available length of time to record is fairly long comparedto the standard mode. The ‘x6 mode’ records the selected TV program withlesser quality compared to the ‘x3 mode’, however, the available lengthof time to record is fairly long compared to the ‘x3 mode’.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Video RecordCalculating Area 206 n to specify the items described hereinbefore.First of all, the channel number is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the start time(S2), the stop time (S3), and the mode (S4) are input and/or selected byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system. Once theforegoing steps are completed, more series of S1 through S4 can berepeated as many as the user of Communication Device 200 desires (S5).Namely, the function of timer video recording enables to timer recordmore than one TV programs (a plurality of channel data).

Once the items described hereinbefore are identified, the items areincorporated into Timer Video Recording Signal TVRS and transferred toPersonal Computer PC via Network NT as described hereinbefore.

Personal Computer PC has an area therein to store the software programdescribed hereinbefore, which implements the timer video recordingfunction. Once the timer video recording function is initiated byreceiving Timer Video Recording Signal TVRS from Communication Device200 via Network NT (S1), the CPU of Personal Computer PC checks thecurrent time (S2). If the current time matches the start time retrievedfrom Timer Video Recording Signal TVRS (S3), then the CPU of PersonalComputer PC identifies the channel number to be recorded and the modeselected of which the details are explained hereinbefore (S4), andinitiates the recording process of the TV program (i.e., channel data)(S5). The CPU of Personal Computer PC continues the recording processuntil the current time matches the stop time retrieved from Timer VideoRecording Signal TVRS (S6). The recording process is terminated when thecurrent time matches the stop time (S7).

Personal computer PC has an area therein which is similar to Video DataStorage Area 206 o described hereinbefore. The area is divided intocertain areas in order to store a plurality of channel data as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, the TV programs (a plurality ofchannel data) of channel numbers 1, 2, and 3 are stored in each area ofPersonal Computer PC (which corresponds to Areas 206 o 1, 206 o 2, and206 o 3 hereinbefore). Since each area of Personal Computer PC isdivided into certain areas and thereby enables to store a plurality ofchannel data, a plurality of channel data (more than one TV program) canbe recorded simultaneously.

Personal computer PC has an area therein which is similar to Timer DataStorage Area 206 t described hereinbefore. All data are retrieved fromTimer Video Recording Signal TVRS. In this embodiment, the dataregarding the channel number to be recorded, the start time from whichthe recording should be started (including day, date, and time), thestop time until which the recording should be continued (including day,date, and time), and the mode which represents the high quality mode,the standard mode, the ‘x3 mode’ and the ‘x6 mode’ are stored in thearea of Personal Computer PC.

The area explained in the previous paragraph is composed of two types ofareas. The first area administers the current time, and the second areastores the items explained hereinbefore. Here, the first area is a timersimilar to Timer 206 t 4 hereinbefore and provides the current time tothe CPU of Personal Computer PC, which is utilized in S3 (initiation ofthe video recording) and S6 (termination of the video recording) of theflowchart described hereinbefore. The second area is similar to Areas206 t 1, 206 t 2, and 206 t 3 hereinbefore. The areas of PersonalComputer PC corresponding to Areas 206 t 1, 206 t 2, and 206 t 3hereinbefore store the data regarding the channel number to be recorded,the start time from which the recording should be started (includingday, date, and time), the stop time until which the recording should becontinued (including day, date, and time), and the mode which representsthe high quality mode, the standard mode, the ‘x3 mode’ and the ‘x6mode’. In other words, the area of Personal Computer PC corresponding toArea 206 t 1 stores the start time, the stop time, and the mode forChannel 1, the area of Personal Computer PC corresponding to Area 206 t2 stores the start time, the stop time, and the mode for Channel 2, andthe area of Personal Computer PC corresponding to Area 206 t 3 storesthe start time, the stop time, and the mode for Channel 3.

<<Cellular TV—Summary>>

The foregoing invention may be summarized as the following. Acommunication device comprising a TV monitoring system, a wirelesscommunication system, and an antenna wherein said antenna receives aplurality of TV data which are displayed on a display means installedinto said communication device, and said antenna also receivescommunication data which is necessary to operate said wirelesscommunication system thereby enabling the user of said communicationdevice to enjoy watching TV on said display means as well as utilizingsaid wireless communication system.

<<On Demand TV Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the on demand TV function whichenables Communication Device 200 to display a TV program on LCD 201(FIG. 1) on the user's demand.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host InformationStorage Area H00 a of Host H. In this embodiment, Host InformationStorage Area H00 a includes On Demand TV Information Storage Area H40 aof which the data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in On Demand TVInformation Storage Area H40 a. In this embodiment, On Demand TVInformation Storage Area H40 a includes On Demand TV Data Storage AreaH40 b and On Demand TV Software Storage Area H40 c. On Demand TV DataStorage Area H40 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described in FIGS. 836through 838. On Demand TV Software Storage Area H40 c stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in On Demand TVData Storage Area H40 b. In this embodiment, On Demand TV Data StorageArea H40 b includes TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1 of which thedata stored therein are described in FIGS. 837 and 838.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in TV Program DataStorage Area H40 b 1. In this embodiment, TV Program Data Storage AreaH40 b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘TV Program Data’.The column ‘Channel ID’ stores the identifications of the channelsavailable on Communication Device 200. The column ‘TV Program Data’stores the TV program data of the corresponding channel ID. In theexample described in the present drawing, TV Program Data Storage AreaH40 b 1 stores ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID1 of which the ‘TV Program Data’ isH40TPD1; ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID2 of which the ‘TV Program Data’ isH40TPD2; ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID3 of which the ‘TV Program Data’ isH40TPD3; ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID4 of which the ‘TV Program Data’ isH40TPD4; and ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID5 of which the ‘TV Program Data’ isH40TPD5.

This paragraph illustrates the structure of TV program data stored inthe column ‘TV Program Data’ of TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1.Taking TV Program Data H40TPD1 for example, the data comprises two typesof data, i.e., the time data (which is described as ‘Time (Min)’ in thepresent drawing) and the TV program packet data (which is described as‘TV Program Packet Data’ in the present drawing). TV Program DataH40TPD1, in the present example, is divided into ten TV program packetdata, i.e., H40TPD1 a, H40TPD1 b, H40TPD1 c, H40TPD1 d, H40TPD1 e,H40TPD1 f, H40TPD1 g, H40TPD1 h, H40TPD1 i, H40TPD1 j, and H40TPD1 k ofwhich the corresponding time data are ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’, ‘5’, ‘6’,‘7’, ‘8’, ‘9’, and ‘10’, respectively. Each of time data ‘1’ through‘10’ represents the time frame which the corresponding TV program datais displayed. Namely, TV program data H40TPD1 a is displayed at time‘0’. TV program data H40TPD1 b is displayed at time ‘1’. TV program dataH40TPD1 c is displayed at time ‘2’. TV program data H40TPD1 d isdisplayed at time ‘3’. TV program data H40TPD1 e is displayed at time‘4’. TV program data H40TPD1 f is displayed at time ‘5’. TV program dataH40TPD1 g is displayed at time ‘6’. TV program data H40TPD1 h isdisplayed at time ‘7’. TV program data H40TPD1 i is displayed at time‘8’. TV program data H40TPD1 j is displayed at time ‘9’. TV program dataH40TPD1 k is displayed at time ‘10’. Therefore, TV Program Data H40TPD1can be paused and resumed from any time frame by identifying the timedata. All TV program data stored in TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1are composed of a plurality of TV program packet data, and a time datais assigned to each TV program packet data as described hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in On Demand TVSoftware Storage Area H40 c. In this embodiment, On Demand TV SoftwareStorage Area H40 c stores TV Program Packet Data Sending Software H40 c1, Timer Software H40 c 2, Current Time Identifying Software H40 c 3,Next Packet Data Sending Software H40 c 4, TV Program Pausing SoftwareH40 c 5, TV Program Resume Software H40 c 6, and TV Program InitializingSoftware H40 c 7. TV Program Packet Data Sending Software H40 c 1 is thesoftware program which is described hereinafter. Timer Software H40 c 2is the software program which is described hereinafter. Current TimeIdentifying Software H40 c 3 is the software program which identifiesthe current time produced by Timer Software H40 c 2. Next Packet DataSending Software H40 c 4 is the software program which is describedhereinafter. TV Program Pausing Software H40 c 5 is the software programwhich is described hereinafter. TV Program Resume Software H40 c 6 isthe software program which is described hereinafter. TV ProgramInitializing Software H40 c 7 is the software program which is describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes OnDemand TV Information Storage Area 20640 a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and software programs stored in On Demand TV InformationStorage Area 20640 a are downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in On Demand TVInformation Storage Area 20640 a. In this embodiment, On Demand TVInformation Storage Area 20640 a includes On Demand TV Data Storage Area20640 b and On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c. On Demand TVData Storage Area 20640 b stores the data necessary to implement thepresent function on the side of Communication Device 200, such as theones described in FIGS. 842 and 843. On Demand TV Software Storage Area20640 c stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in On Demand TVData Storage Area 20640 b. In this embodiment, On Demand TV Data StorageArea 20640 b includes TV Program Data Storage Area 20640 b 1 of whichthe data stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Program Data StorageArea 20640 b 1. In this embodiment, TV Program Data Storage Area 20640 b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘TV Program PacketData’. The column ‘Channel ID’ stores the identification of the channelsavailable on Communication Device 200. The column ‘TV Program PacketData’ stores the TV program packet data of the corresponding channel IDreceived from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in On Demand TVSoftware Storage Area 20640 c. In this embodiment, On Demand TV SoftwareStorage Area 20640 c stores TV Program Initiating Software 20640 c 1, TVProgram Packet Data Receiving Software 20640 c 2, TV Program Packet DataDisplaying Software 20640 c 3, Next Packet Data Receiving Software 20640c 4, TV Program Pausing Software 20640 c 5, TV Program Resume Software20640 c 6, and TV Program Initializing Software 20640 c 7. TV ProgramInitiating Software 20640 c 1 is the software program which is describedhereinafter. TV Program Packet Data Receiving Software 20640 c 2 is thesoftware program which is described hereinafter. TV Program Packet DataDisplaying Software 20640 c 3 is the software program which is describedhereinafter. Next Packet Data Receiving Software 20640 c 4 is thesoftware program which is described hereinafter. TV Program PausingSoftware 20640 c 5 is the software program which is describedhereinafter. TV Program Resume Software 20640 c 6 is the softwareprogram which is described hereinafter. TV Program Initializing Software20640 c 7 is the software program which is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Timer Software H40 c 2 stored in On Demand TVSoftware Storage Area H40 c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host H, firstof all, resets the time to ‘0’ (S1). Host H administers the time, andeverytime one minute has past (S2), the timer is incrimented by ‘1’until the time reaches the maximum number. Referring to TV Program DataH40TPD1 described hereinbefore for example, when the time is reset to‘0’, the TV program packet data H40TPD1 a is ready to be retrieved fromTV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1. After one minute has passed, thetimer is incrimented and the time is ‘1’ at which the TV program packetdata H40TPD1 b is ready to be retrieved from TV Program Data StorageArea H40 b 1. When the timer is incrimented and the time is ‘2’, the TVprogram packet data H40TPD1 c is ready to be retrieved from TV ProgramData Storage Area H40 b 1. In the same manner, when the timer isincrimented and the time is ‘3’, the TV program packet data H40TPD1 d isready to be retrieved from TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1; whenthe timer is incrimented and the time is ‘4’, the TV program packet dataH40TPD1 e is ready to be retrieved from TV Program Data Storage Area H40b 1; when the timer is incrimented and the time is ‘5’, the TV programpacket data H40TPD1 f is ready to be retrieved from TV Program DataStorage Area H40 b 1; when the timer is incrimented and the time is ‘6’,the TV program packet data H40TPD1 g is ready to be retrieved from TVProgram Data Storage Area H40 b 1; when the timer is incrimented and thetime is ‘7’, the TV program packet data H40TPD1 h is ready to beretrieved from TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1; when the timer isincrimented and the time is ‘8’, the TV program packet data H40TPD1 i isready to be retrieved from TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1; whenthe timer is incrimented and the time is ‘9’, the TV program packet dataH40TPD1 j is ready to be retrieved from TV Program Data Storage Area H40b 1; when the timer is incrimented and the time is ‘10’, the TV programpacket data H40TPD1 k is ready to be retrieved from TV Program DataStorage Area H40 b 1. The timer is no longer be incrimented thereaftersince the time ‘10’ is the maximum number for TV Program Data H40TPD1.The maximum number of each TV program data stored in TV Program DataStorage Area H40 b 1 may be different from the other TV program datastored therein.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Initiating Software 20640 c 1stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c of CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, a certain channel ID is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Next, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends TV Program Data Request 20640TPDR toHost H of which the data stored therein are described hereinafter (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the data included in TV Program Data Request20640TPDR described in S2 hereinbefore. In this embodiment, TV ProgramData Request 20640TPDR includes Request Signal 20640TPDR1 and Channel ID20640TPDR2. Request Signal 20640TPDR1 is an indication to Host H toretrieve the TV program data therefrom corresponding to Channel ID20640TPDR2, and Channel ID 20640TPDR2 is the channel ID selected in S1hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Packet Data Sending Software H40 c1 stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area H40 c of Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H, first of all, receives TV Program Data Request20640TPDR (S1). Host H then retrieves Channel ID 20640TPDR2 therefrom(S2), and identifies the channel ID (S3). Host H identifies the currenttime of the TV program data of the corresponding channel ID by utilizingCurrent Time Identifying Software H40 c 3 (S4), and retrieves thecorresponding TV program packet data from TV Program Data Storage AreaH40 b 1 (S5). Host H sends to Communication Device 200 thereafterRequested TV Program Data H40RTPD of which the data stored therein aredescribed hereinafter (S6). Assuming that Channel ID 20640TPDR2 includedin TV Program Data Request 20640TPDR represents ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID1stored in TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1. Host H retrieves andidentifies the ‘Channel ID’ as H40ChID1 in S2 and S3. Assuming that theTV program corresponding to ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID1 is already on-air forfive minutes and is just about to start the sixth minute of the TVprogram. Host H identifies the current time (i.e., ‘Time (Min)’) as ‘5’in S4 by utilizing Current Time Identifying Software H40 c 3, andretrieves the corresponding ‘TV Program Packet Data’ H40TPD1 f from TVProgram Data Storage Area H40 b 1 in S5, which is sent to CommunicationDevice 200 as Requested TV Program Data H40RTPD in S6.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Requested TV Program DataH40RTPD described in S6 hereinbefore. In this embodiment, Requested TVProgram Data H40RTPD comprises Response Signal H40RTPD1, Channel IDH40RTPD2, and TV Program Packet Data H40RTPD3. Response Signal H40RTPD1indicates that Requested TV Program Data H40RTPD is a response to TVProgram Data Request 20640TPDR described hereinbefore. Channel IDH40RTPD2 represents ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID1 stored in TV Program DataStorage Area H40 b 1 in the present example. TV Program Packet DataH40RTPD3 represents ‘TV Program Packet Data’ H40TPD1 f stored in TVProgram Data Storage Area H40 b 1 in the present example.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Packet Data Receiving Software20640 c 2 stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c ofCommunication Device 200. Referring to the present drawing, CPU 211(FIG. 1) receives Requested TV Program Data H40RTPD sent by Host H in S6hereinbefore (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves Channel ID H40RTPD2 and TVProgram Packet Data H40RTPD3 from Requested TV Program Data H40RTPD(S2), and stores these data in TV Program Data Storage Area 20640 b 1(S3). In the present example, ‘Channel ID’ H40ChID1 and ‘TV ProgramPacket Data’ H40TPD1 f are retrieved in S2 and stored in TV Program DataStorage Area 20640 b 1 in S3.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Packet Data Displaying Software20640 c 3 stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c ofCommunication Device 200. Referring to the present drawing, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves TV Program Packet Data H40RTPD3 from TV Program DataStorage Area 20640 b 1 (S1), and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200 (S2). In the present example, ‘TV ProgramPacket Data’ H40TPD1 f is retrieved in S1 and displayed on LCD 201 inS2.

This paragraph illustrates both Next Packet Data Sending Software H40 c4 stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area H40 c of Host H and NextPacket Data Receiving Software 20640 c 4 stored in On Demand TV SoftwareStorage Area 20640 c of Communication Device 200. Referring to thepresent drawing, Host H retrieves the next TV program packet data fromTV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1 (S1), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 receives the next TV program packet data (S3), and stores the datain TV Program Data Storage Area 20640 b 1 (S4), which is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 thereafter. Here, the nextTV program packet data is the data which is scheduled to be sent to anddisplayed on Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, H40TPD1 b isthe next TV program packet data if the TV program packet data H40TPD1 ais already sent to and displayed on Communication Device 200, H40TPD1 cis the next TV program packet data if the TV program packet data H40TPD1b is already sent to and displayed on Communication Device 200, H40TPD1d is the next TV program packet data if the TV program packet dataH40TPD1 c is already sent to and displayed on Communication Device 200,H40TPD1 e is the next TV program packet data if the TV program packetdata H40TPD1 d is already sent to and displayed on Communication Device200, H40TPD1 f is the next TV program packet data if the TV programpacket data H40TPD1 e is already sent to and displayed on CommunicationDevice 200, H40TPD1 g is the next TV program packet data if the TVprogram packet data H40TPD1 f is already sent to and displayed onCommunication Device 200, H40TPD1 h is the next TV program packet dataif the TV program packet data H40TPD1 g is already sent to and displayedon Communication Device 200, H40TPD1 i is the next TV program packetdata if the TV program packet data H40TPD1 h is already sent to anddisplayed on Communication Device 200, H40TPD1 j is the next TV programpacket data if the TV program packet data H40TPD1 i is already sent toand displayed on Communication Device 200, and H40TPD1 k is the next TVprogram packet data if the TV program packet data H40TPD1 j is alreadysent to and displayed on Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates both TV Program Pausing Software 20640 c 5stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c of CommunicationDevice 200 and TV Program Pausing Software H40 c 5 stored in On DemandTV Software Storage Area H40 c of Host H. Referring to the presentdrawing, a pause signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then displays thestill image included in the TV program packet data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)at the time the pause signal is input in S1 (S2). CPU 211 sends a pauserequest (S3) which is received by Host H (S4). Host H stops sending thenext TV program packet data to Communication Device 200 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates both TV Program Resume Software 20640 c 6stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c of CommunicationDevice 200 and TV Program Resume Software H40 c 6 stored in On Demand TVSoftware Storage Area H40 c of Host H. Referring to the present drawing,a resume signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then sends a resumerequest to Host H indicating to resume sending the next TV programpacket data (S2). Upon receiving the resume request (S3), Host H resumessending the next TV program packet data to Communication Device 200(S4). The next TV program packet data of the next TV program packet datais sent thereafter, and the remaining TV program packet data are sent toand displayed on Communication Device 200 unless the pause signaldescribed in S1 hereinbefore or any signal or the like is input toCommunication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates both TV Program Initializing Software 20640 c7 stored in On Demand TV Software Storage Area 20640 c of CommunicationDevice 200 and TV Program Initializing Software H40 c 7 stored in OnDemand TV Software Storage Area H40 c of Host H. Referring to thepresent drawing, an initializing signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then sends an initializing request to Host H indicating tostart the TV program from the beginning (S2). Upon receiving theinitializing request (S3), Host H initializes the timer of TimerSoftware H40 c 2 to ‘0’, and thereby the first TV program packet data isready to be sent to and displayed on Communication Device 200 (S4). Inthe present example, the timer of Timer Software H40 c 2 is initializedto ‘0’, thereby ‘TV Program Packet Data’ H40TPD1 a of TV Program DataH40TPD1 stored in TV Program Data Storage Area H40 b 1 is ready to besent to and displayed on Communication Device 200. The first TV programpacket data, ‘TV Program Packet Data’ H40TPD1 a in the present example,is sent to Communication Device 200 (S5). The previous explanationapplies hereafter until the pause signal or any signal of the like isinput to Communication Device 200.

<<On Demand TV Function—Summary>>

(1) An on demand TV system comprising a host computer and acommunication device wherein said host computer stores a TV program,said communication device requests for said TV program, said TV programis sent to said communication device and displayed on a display of saidcommunication device, said TV program is paused when a pause signal isinput via said input device.

(2) A communication device comprising a microphone, a speaker, adisplay, an input device and a multiple mode implementor, wherein saidmultiple mode implementor implements a voice communication mode and anon demand TV mode, a series of audio data are input to and output fromsaid microphone and said speaker respectively when said voicecommunication mode is implemented, a TV program is displayed on saiddisplay and said TV program is paused when a pause signal is input viasaid input device when said on demand TV mode is implemented.

(3) An on demand TV software program which displays a TV program on adisplay of a communication device wherein said TV program is pausedunder the control of said on demand TV software program when a pausesignal is input via said input device.

(4) Said TV program in summary (1), (2), or (3) is resumed from thepoint said TV program is paused when a resume signal is input via saidinput device.

(5) Said TV program in summary (1), (2), or (3) is replayed from thebeginning of said TV program when an initiation signal is input via saidinput device.

<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple mode implementingfunction of Communication Device 200 which enables to activate andimplement a plurality of modes, functions, and/or systems described inthis specification simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in RAM 206(FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementing function (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690 a.Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690 a stores Multiple ModeImplementer 20690 b, Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f, all of which are software programs.Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b administers the overall implementationof the present function. One of the major tasks of Multiple ModeImplementer 20690 b is to administer and control the timing and sequenceof Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater20690 f For example, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b executes them inthe following order: Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f Mode List Displaying Software 20690 cdisplays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a list of a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems explained in this specification of which thesequence is explained hereinafter. Mode Selecting Software 20690 dselects a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systemsexplained in this specification of which the sequence is explainedhereinafter. Mode Activating Software 20690 e activates a certain amountor all modes, functions, and/or systems selected by the Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d of which the sequence is explained hereinafter. ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b which reactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e of whichthe sequence is explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode List Displaying Software20690 c. CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690 c, displays a list of a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems described in this specification on LCD 201(FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Selecting Software 20690d. The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemidentifying one of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Activating Software20690 e. CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode Activating Software20690 e, activates the mode, function, or, system selected in S2described hereinbefore. CPU 211 thereafter implements the activatedmode, function, or system as described in the relevant section of thisspecification.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Implementation Repeater20690 f The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Once the activation of the selected mode, function, or systemdescribed hereinbefore is completed, and if the input signal indicatesto repeat the process to activate another mode, function, or system(S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690 f, executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b, whichreactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d, and Mode Activating Software 20690 e to activate thesecond mode, function, or system while the first mode, function, orsystem is implemented by utilizing the method of so-called ‘timesharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d, and Mode Activating Software 20690 e can be repeatedlyexecuted until all modes, function, and systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes, functions,and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explained in S2 soindicates.

As another embodiment, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b, Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690 d, ModeActivating Software 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690 fdescribed hereinbefore may be integrated into one software program,Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b. CPU 211 (FIG. 1), first of all,displays a list of a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/orsystems described in this specification on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Next,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system identifyingone of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD 201 (S2),and CPU 211 interprets the input signal and selects the correspondingmode, function, or system (S3). CPU 211 activates the mode, function, orsystem selected in S3, and thereafter implements the activated mode,function, or system as described in the relevant section of thisspecification (S4). Once the activation of the selected mode, function,or system described in S4 is completed, the user of Communication Device200 inputs an input signal by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S5). If the input signal indicates to repeat theprocess to activate another mode, function, or system (S6), CPU 211repeats the steps S1 through S4 to activate the second mode, function,or system while the first mode, function, or system is implemented byutilizing the method so-called ‘time sharing’. The steps of S1 though S4can be repeatedly executed until all modes, function, and systemsdisplayed on LCD 201 are selected and activated. The activation ofmodes, functions, and/or systems is not repeated if the input signalexplained in S5 so indicates. As another embodiment, before or at thetime one software program is activated, CPU 211 may, eitherautomatically or manually (i.e., by a signal input by the user ofCommunication Device), terminate the other software programs alreadyactivated or prohibit other software programs to be activated while onesoftware program is implemented in order to save the limited space ofRAM 206, thereby allowing only one software program implemented at atime. For the avoidance of doubt, the meaning of each term ‘mode(s)’,‘function(s)’, and ‘system(s)’ is equivalent to the others in thisspecification. Namely, the meaning of ‘mode(s)’ includes and isequivalent to that of ‘function(s)’ and ‘system(s)’, the meaning of‘function(s)’ includes and is equivalent to that of ‘mode(s)’ and‘system(s)’, and the meaning of ‘system(s)’ includes and is equivalentto that of ‘mode(s)’ and ‘function(s)’. Therefore, even only mode(s) isexpressly utilized in this specification, it impliedly includesfunction(s) and/or system(s) by its definition.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

The paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600 filed2004 Jul. 23 incorporated to this application by reference are, based onU.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402: the preamble (col 57 line 64-col 58 line 15; nodrawings); Communication Device 200 (Voice Communication Mode) (col 58line 16-col 60 line 2; FIGS. 1 through 2c); Voice Recognition System(col 60 line 3-col 65 line 3; FIGS. 3 through 19); Positioning System(col 65 line 4-col 69 line 46; FIGS. 20a through 32g); Auto BackupSystem (col 69 line 47-col 70 line 51; FIGS. 33 through 37); SignalAmplifier (col 70 line 52-col 71 line 13; FIG. 38); Audio/Video DataCapturing System (col 71 line 14-col 72 line 67; FIGS. 39 through 44b);Digital Mirror Function (1) (col 73 line 1-col 74 line 45; FIGS. 44cthrough 44e); Caller ID System (col 74 line 46-col 75 line 18; FIGS. 45through 47); Stock Purchasing Function (col 75 line 19-col 76 line 23;FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function (col 76 line 24-col 76 line67; FIGS. 53a and 53b); Call Blocking Function (col 77 line 1-col 78line 35; FIGS. 54 through 59); Online Payment Function (col 78 line36-col 79 line 67; FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System (col 80 line1-col 84 line 3; FIGS. 65 through 74a); Remote Controlling System (col84 line 4-col 87 line 10; FIGS. 75 through 85); Auto Emergency CallingSystem (col 87 line 11-col 87 line 62; FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TVFunction (col 87 line 63-col 101 line 54; FIGS. 88 through 135); 3DVideo Game Function (col 101 line 55-col 104 line 18; FIGS. 136 through144); Digital Mirror Function (2) (col 104 line 19-col 106 line 6; FIGS.145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2) (col 106 line 7-col107 line 38; FIGS. 156 through 160); Positioning System—GPS SearchEngine (col 107 line 39-col 117 line 12; FIGS. 161 through 182); MobileIgnition Key Function (col 117 line 13-col 121 line 35; FIGS. 183through 201); Voice Print Authentication System (col 121 line 36-col 123line 44; FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication System (col123 line 45-col 126 line 7; FIGS. 212 through 221); Auto Time AdjustFunction (col 126 line 8-col 126 line 48; FIGS. 222 through 224);Video/Photo Mode (col 126 line 49-col 131 line 63; FIGS. 225 through242); Call Taxi Function (col 131 line 64-col 140 line 52; FIGS. 243through 269); Shooting Video Game Function (col 140 line 53-col 143 line42; FIGS. 270 through 283); Driving Video Game Function (col 143 line43-col 146 line 7; FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book UpdatingFunction (col 146 line 8-col 149 line 13; FIGS. 295 through 312); BatchAddress Book Updating Function—With Host (col 149 line 14-col 152 line4; FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 152 line 5-col 152 line 49; FIGS.329a through 329c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—With Host (col 152line 50-col 156 line 16; FIGS. 330 through 350); Batch SchedulerUpdating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 156 line 17-col 156 line67; FIGS. 351 and 352); Calculator Function (col 157 line 1-col 157 line59; FIGS. 353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function (col 157 line 60-col159 line 9; FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Function (col 159line 10-col 162 line 61; FIGS. 361 through 373); TV Remote ControllerFunction (col 162 line 62-col 167 line 19; FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PCInter-communicating Function (col 167 line 20-col 171 line 49; FIGS. 413through 427); PDWR Sound Selecting Function (col 171 line 50-col 179line 3; FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function (col 179 line4-col 180 line 67; FIGS. 457 through 466); Another Embodiment OfCommunication Device 200 (col 181 line 1-col 183 line 13; FIGS. 467athrough 467d); Stereo Audio Data Output Function (col 183 line 14-col185 line 67; FIGS. 468 through 479); Stereo Visual Data Output Function(col 186 line 1-col 188 line 51; FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple SignalProcessing Function (col 188 line 52-col 199 line 13; FIGS. 492 through529); Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function (col 199 line 14-col 204line 67; FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Host (col 205 line1-col 208 line 22; FIGS. 554 through 567); CCD Bar Code Reader Function(col 208 line 23-col 211 line 27; FIGS. 568 through 579); Online RentingFunction (col 211 line 28-col 225 line 57; FIGS. 580 through 633); SOSCalling Function (col 225 line 58-col 228 line 31; FIGS. 634 through645); Input Device (col 228 line 32-col 229 line 50; FIGS. 646 through650); PC Remote Controlling Function (col 229 line 51-col 235 line 27;FIGS. 651 through 670); PC Remote Downloading Function (col 235 line28-col 244 line 15; FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual PlaybackFunction (col 244 line 16-col 249 line 15; FIGS. 702 through 716); AudioPlayback Function (col 249 line 16-col 253 line 58; FIGS. 717 through731); Ticket Purchasing Function (col 253 line 59-col 259 line 5; FIGS.732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Function (col 259 line 6-col 263line 43; FIGS. 754 through 774); Business Card Function (col 263 line44-col 266 line 6; FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function (col266 line 7-col 267 line 17; FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time JobFinding Function (col 267 line 18-col 270 line 57; FIGS. 787 through801); Parking Lot Finding Function (col 270 line 58-col 277 line 47;FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts Upgradable Communication Device (col 277line 48-col 280 line 67; FIGS. 833a through 833x); On Demand TV Function(col 281 line 1-col 287 line 3; FIGS. 834 through 855);Inter-communicating TV Function (col 287 line 4-col 292 line 6; FIGS.856 through 882); Display Controlling Function (col 292 line 7-col 295line 4; FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function(col 295 line 5-col 301 line 34; FIGS. 894a through 917); DisplayBrightness Controlling Function (col 301 line 35-col 302 line 50; FIGS.918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointing Function (col 302 line51-col 311 line 12; FIGS. 924 through 950f); Digital Camera Function(col 311 line 13-col 316 line 15; FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone NumberLinking Function (col 316 line 16-col 320 line 5; FIGS. 968a through983); Multiple Window Displaying Function (col 320 line 6-col 323 line32; FIGS. 984 through 995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function (col 323line 33-col 328 line 64; FIGS. 996 through 1021); House ItemPin-pointing Function (col 328 line 65-col 356 line 64; FIGS. 1022through 1152); Membership Administrating Function (col 356 line 65-col363 line 67; FIGS. 1153 through 1188); Keyword Search Timer RecordingFunction (col 364 line 1-col 385 line 55; FIGS. 1189 through 1254);Weather Forecast Displaying Function (col 385 line 56-col 394 line 56;FIGS. 1255 through 1288); Multiple Language Displaying Function (col 394line 57-col 411 line 63; FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's InformationDisplaying Function (col 411 line 64-col 423 line 52; FIGS. 1332 through1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Phone) (col423 line 53-col 430 line 46; FIGS. 1394 through 1415); CommunicationDevice Remote Controlling Function (By Web) (col 430 line 47-col 437line 61; FIGS. 1416 through 1437); Shortcut Icon Displaying Function(col 437 line 62-col 442 line 29; FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task TrayIcon Displaying Function (col 442 line 30-col 445 line 62; FIGS. 1456through 1470); Multiple Channel Processing Function (col 445 line 63-col455 line 27; FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery Charging Function(col 455 line 28-col 458 line 26; FIGS. 1499 through 1509); OS UpdatingFunction (col 458 line 27-col 489 line 3; FIGS. 1510 through 1575);Device Managing Function (col 489 line 4-col 492 line 59; FIGS. 1576through 1587); Automobile Controlling Function (col 492 line 60-col 505line 55; FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function (col 505 line 56-col 512line 51; FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple Mode Implementing Function(col 512 line 52-col 515 line 56; FIGS. 395 through 400); MultipleSoftware Download Function (col 515 line 57-col 518 line 3; FIGS. 401through 407); Selected Software Distributing Function (col 518 line4-col 523 line 54; FIGS. 1376 through 1393d); Multiple Software DownloadAnd Mode Implementation Function (col 523 line 55-col 525 line 33; FIGS.408 through 412); and the last sentence (col 525 line 34-col 525 line51; no drawings). If there is ever discrepancy between the disclosuresof this application and U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, the latter prevails.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A communication device comprising: amicrophone; a speaker; an input device; a display; an antenna; awireless voice communication implementer, wherein wireless voicecommunication is implemented via said antenna; a route displayingimplementer, wherein said communication device calculates route from afirst location to a second location and said route is displayed on saiddisplay; and a multiple language implementer, wherein the language modeselected via said input device is implemented, wherein said languagemode selected is one of a plurality of language modes including a 1stlanguage mode, a 2nd language mode, and a 3rd language mode, whereinwhen said 1st language mode is selected via said input device, uservisual interface is displayed on said display by utilizing a 1stlanguage data stored in said communication device, wherein when said 2ndlanguage mode is selected via said input device, said user visualinterface is displayed on said display by utilizing a 2nd language datastored in said communication device, and wherein when said 3rd languagemode is selected via said input device, said user visual interface isdisplayed on said display by utilizing a 3rd language data stored insaid communication device.
 2. The communication device of claim 1,wherein said communication device is device which is installed in anautomobile.
 3. The communication device of claim 1, wherein saidcommunication device is device which is installed in a motorcycle. 4.The communication device of claim 1, wherein when said communicationdevice is powered off under said 1st language mode and powered onthereafter, said user visual interface is displayed on said display byutilizing said 1st language data stored in said communication device. 5.The communication device of claim 1, wherein when said communicationdevice is powered off under said 2nd language mode and powered onthereafter, said user visual interface is displayed on said display byutilizing said 2nd language data stored in said communication device. 6.The communication device of claim 1, wherein said user visual interfaceincludes a first predetermined item and a second predetermined item, andwhen said 1st language mode is selected via said input device, saidfirst predetermined item and said second predetermined item aredisplayed on said display by utilizing said 1st language data stored insaid communication device.
 7. A system comprising: a communicationdevice comprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display,and an antenna; a wireless voice communication implementer, whereinwireless voice communication is implemented via said antenna; a routedisplaying implementer, wherein said communication device calculatesroute from a first location to a second location and said route isdisplayed on said display; and a multiple language implementer, whereinthe language mode selected via said input device is implemented, whereinsaid language mode selected is one of a plurality of language modesincluding a 1st language mode, a 2nd language mode, and a 3rd languagemode, wherein when said 1st language mode is selected via said inputdevice, user visual interface is displayed on said display by utilizinga 1st language data stored in said communication device, wherein whensaid 2nd language mode is selected via said input device, said uservisual interface is displayed on said display by utilizing a 2ndlanguage data stored in said communication device, and wherein when said3rd language mode is selected via said input device, said user visualinterface is displayed on said display by utilizing a 3rd language datastored in said communication device.
 8. The system of claim 7, whereinsaid communication device is device which is installed in an automobile.9. The system of claim 7, wherein said communication device is devicewhich is installed in a motorcycle.
 10. The system of claim 7, whereinwhen said communication device is powered off under said 1st languagemode and powered on thereafter, said user visual interface is displayedon said display by utilizing said 1st language data stored in saidcommunication device.
 11. The system of claim 7, wherein when saidcommunication device is powered off under said 2nd language mode andpowered on thereafter, said user visual interface is displayed on saiddisplay by utilizing said 2nd language data stored in said communicationdevice.
 12. The system of claim 7, wherein said user visual interfaceincludes a first predetermined item and a second predetermined item, andwhen said 1st language mode is selected via said input device, saidfirst predetermined item and said second predetermined item aredisplayed on said display by utilizing said 1st language data stored insaid communication device.
 13. A method for a communication devicecomprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, and anantenna, said method comprising: a wireless voice communicationimplementing step, wherein wireless voice communication is implementedvia said antenna; a route displaying implementing step, wherein saidcommunication device calculates route from a first location to a secondlocation and said route is displayed on said display; and a multiplelanguage implementing step, wherein the language mode selected via saidinput device is implemented, wherein said language mode selected is oneof a plurality of language modes including a 1st language mode, a 2ndlanguage mode, and a 3rd language mode, wherein when said 1st languagemode is selected via said input device, user visual interface isdisplayed on said display by utilizing a 1st language data stored insaid communication device, wherein when said 2nd language mode isselected via said input device, said user visual interface is displayedon said display by utilizing a 2nd language data stored in saidcommunication device, and wherein when said 3rd language mode isselected via said input device, said user visual interface is displayedon said display by utilizing a 3rd language data stored in saidcommunication device.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein saidcommunication device is device which is installed in an automobile. 15.The method of claim 13, wherein said communication device is devicewhich is installed in a motorcycle.
 16. The method of claim 13, whereinwhen said communication device is powered off under said 1st languagemode and powered on thereafter, said user visual interface is displayedon said display by utilizing said 1st language data stored in saidcommunication device.
 17. The method of claim 13, wherein when saidcommunication device is powered off under said 2nd language mode andpowered on thereafter, said user visual interface is displayed on saiddisplay by utilizing said 2nd language data stored in said communicationdevice.
 18. The method of claim 13, wherein said user visual interfaceincludes a first predetermined item and a second predetermined item, andwhen said 1st language mode is selected via said input device, saidfirst predetermined item and said second predetermined item aredisplayed on said display by utilizing said 1st language data.